OM33809U
User Manual: 2008 Lexus ES 350 Service Manual | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 460
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column. 2 When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information. 3 Interior features Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience. 4 Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-yourself maintenance, and maintenance information. 5 When trouble arises What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident. 6 Vehicle specifications Detailed vehicle information. 7 For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and seat belt instructions for Canadian owners Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual. 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Index Before driving 1-5. Refueling........................................ 67 Opening the fuel tank cap........... 67 1-1. Key information ........................... 20 1-6. Theft deterrent system............... 70 Keys ...................................................... 20 Engine immobilizer system......... 70 Alarm.................................................... 72 Theft prevention labels (for USA)......................................... 74 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk .................. 22 Smart access system with push-button start .......................... 22 Wireless remote control .............. 34 Doors.................................................... 37 Trunk...................................................... 41 1-7. Safety information....................... 75 Correct driving posture ............... 75 SRS airbags ....................................... 77 Front passenger occupant classification system................... 88 Child restraint systems ................. 93 Installing child restraints............... 97 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel).......................... 43 Front seats.......................................... 43 Driving position memory ............. 44 Seat position memory ................... 47 Head restraints................................. 49 Seat belts ........................................... 50 Steering wheel.................................. 56 Anti-glare inside rear view mirror ................................................ 57 Outside rear view mirrors.......... 58 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof .......... 60 Power windows................................ 60 Moon roof .......................................... 63 2 2 When driving 2-1. Driving procedures................... 108 Driving the vehicle........................ 108 Engine (ignition) switch ................ 116 Automatic Transmission .............. 119 Turn signal lever............................. 122 Parking brake ................................. 123 2-2. Instrument cluster ..................... 124 Gauges and meters ..................... 124 Indicators and warning lights ... 126 Multi-information display........... 130 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers.................... 134 Headlight switch............................ 134 Fog light switch .............................. 137 Windshield wipers and washer............................................. 138 2-4. Using other driving systems..... 141 Cruise control .................................. 141 Dynamic radar cruise control............................................. 144 Intuitive parking assist ................. 153 Driving assist systems.................. 159 PCS (Pre-Collision System)..... 162 2-5. Driving information ................... 165 Cargo and luggage...................... 165 Vehicle load limits......................... 168 Winter driving tips ........................ 169 Trailer towing.................................. 175 Dinghy towing ................................ 182 3 Interior features 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger............. 184 Automatic air conditioning system ............................................. 184 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ............... 191 3-2. Using the audio system............ 192 Audio system type ........................ 192 Using the radio............................... 194 Using the CD player.................... 201 1 Playing back MP3 and WMA discs.................................. 207 Optimal use of the audio system ............................................. 215 2 Using the AUX adapter............. 218 Using the steering wheel audio switches ............................. 219 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) ................ 221 3 Hands-free phone 4 system features (for cellular phone).................... 221 Using the hands-free phone system 5 (for cellular phone)................... 224 Making a phone call.................... 232 Setting a cellular phone............. 236 Security and system setup........ 240 6 Using the phone book................ 243 3-4. Using the interior lights.......... 249 Interior lights list............................ 249 7 • Front interior lights .................... 251 • Personal lights ............................. 251 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS Index 3-5. Using the storage features .... 252 4-2. Maintenance.............................. 290 List of storage features............... 252 • Glove box..................................... 252 • Console box................................ 253 • Overhead console.................... 255 • Cup holders................................. 256 • Auxiliary box .............................. 258 Maintenance requirements .... 290 General maintenance................ 292 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs ...................................... 295 3-6. Other interior features........... 259 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance............................ 296 Sun visors......................................... 259 Vanity mirror................................. 260 Clock.................................................. 261 Ashtray ............................................. 262 Cigarette lighter ........................... 263 Power outlet................................... 264 Seat heaters and ventilators..................................... 265 Armrest ............................................ 267 Rear sunshade.............................. 268 Extended trunk.............................. 270 Floor mat........................................... 271 Trunk features................................ 272 Garage door opener.................. 274 Compass.......................................... 279 4 Maintenance and care 4-1. Maintenance and care............ 284 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior.................. 284 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior .................... 287 4 Do-it-yourself service precautions.................................. 296 Hood................................................. 300 Positioning a floor jack................ 301 Engine compartment................. 303 Tires .................................................... 318 Tire inflation pressure................. 326 Wheels............................................. 330 Air conditioning filter.................. 332 Electronic key battery ................ 334 Checking and replacing fuses................................................ 336 Headlight aim (vehicles with discharge headlights).................................... 344 Light bulbs....................................... 345 5 When trouble arises 5-1. Essential information .............. 354 If your vehicle needs to be towed ....................................... 354 If you think something is wrong........................................ 360 Fuel pump shut off system ......... 361 Event data recorder.................... 362 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency .............................. 364 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ........................................ 364 If a warning message is displayed....................................... 375 If you have a flat tire.................... 386 If the engine will not start .......... 396 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P............................. 398 If you lose your keys.................... 399 If the electronic key does not operate properly .............. 400 If the vehicle battery is discharged ................................... 402 If your vehicle overheats .......... 405 If the vehicle becomes stuck................................................ 407 6 Vehicle specifications 6-1. Specifications............................. 410 1 Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)...................... 410 Fuel information............................ 420 Tire information ............................ 423 2 6-2. Customization .......................... 435 Customizable features .............. 435 3 6-3. Initialization ............................... 440 Items to initialize ........................... 440 7 4 For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners........................... 442 5 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French).................................... 443 6 Index Abbreviation list .................................. 446 7 Alphabetical index.............................. 448 What to do if... ...................................... 458 5 Pictorial index Exterior Windshield wipers P. 138 Moon roof P. 63 Outside rear view mirrors P. 58 Hood P. 300 Parking lights P. 134 Side marker lights P. 134 Turn signal lights P. 122 Headlights (low beam) P. 134 Fog lights P. 137 Headlights (high beam) P. 134 6 Rear window defogger P. 191 Side marker lights P. 134 Doors P. 37 Trunk Tires P. 318 ●Rotation P. 386 ●Replacement ●Inflation pressure P. 417 P. 41 Tail lights P. 134 Turn signal lights P. 122 Fuel filler door P. 67 7 Pictorial index Interior SRS front passenger airbag P. 77 SRS knee airbags P. 77 Floor mat P. 271 Power window switches P. 60 SRS driver airbag P. 77 Console box P. 253 Seat belts P. 50 A Armrest P. 267 Cup holders P. 256 Front seats P. 43 SRS side airbags P. 77 Power outlet P. 264 AUX adapter P. 218 Head restraints P. 49 8 A Compass P. 279 Moon roof switches P. 63 Garage door opener switches P. 274 Interior lights P. 251 Personal lights P. 251 Personal lights P. 251 SRS curtain shield airbag P. 77 Vanity mirrors P. 260 Sun visors P. 259 Overhead console P. 255 Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 57 9 Pictorial index Interior B Inside door lock button P. 37 Driving position memory switches P. 44 Seat position memory switches P. 47 Door lock switch P. 37 Window lock switch P. 60 Power window switches P. 60 10 C Automatic transmission shift lever P. 119 Seat heater/ventilator switches P. 265 Shift lock override button P. 398 Cigarette lighter P. 263 Ashtray P. 262 Cup holders P. 256 : If equipped 11 Pictorial index Instrument panel Headlight switch P. 134 Turn signal lever P. 122 Fog light switch P. 137 Multi-information display P. 130 Gauges and meters P. 124 Windshield wipers and washer switch P. 138 Engine (ignition) switch P. 116 Trunk opener main switch P. 41 Glove box P. 252 Tire pressure warning system select switch P. 321 Adaptive front lighting system cancel switch P. 135 Tire pressure warning system reset switch P. 320 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch P. 56 Audio remote control switches P. 219 Parking brake pedal P. 123 Hood lock release lever P. 300 12 A Without navigation system Security indicator P. 70, 72 Clock P. 261 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers P. 191 Air conditioning system P. 184 Emergency flashers Audio system P. 192 With navigation system Security indicator P. 70, 72 Emergency flashers Clock P. 261 Navigation system* Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers Air conditioning system* P. 191 Audio system* : If equipped *: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. 13 Pictorial index Instrument panel B Talk switch * P. 225 Telephone switch * P. 225 DISP switch P. 131 Distance switch P. 146 Cruise control switch P. 141, 144 14 C Type A Outside rear view mirror switch P. 58 Instrument panel light control P. 125 Intuitive parking assist switch * P. 153 Rear sunshade switch P. 268 Auxiliary box P. 258 Trunk opener Fuel filler door opener Type B P. 41 P. 67 Outside rear view mirror switch P. 58 Instrument panel light control P. 125 Rear sunshade switch P. 268 Auxiliary box P. 258 Trunk opener Fuel filler door opener P. 41 P. 67 : If equipped *: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. 15 For your information Main Owner’s Manual Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice. Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment. Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle. This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty. Installation of a mobile two-way radio system As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation. 16 Scrapping of your Lexus The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle. Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries. CAUTION ■ General precautions while driving Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that will hurt or kill you, your occupants or others. Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents. Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others. ■ General precaution regarding children’s safety Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. When left unattended, children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children. 17 Symbols used throughout this manual Cautions & Notices CAUTION This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others. NOTICE This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment. Symbols used in illustrations Safety symbol The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.” Arrows indicating operations Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices. Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens). 18 Before driving 1-1. Key information ............... 20 Keys.............................................. 20 1 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof ....................... 60 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ............................... 22 Power windows.......................... 60 Smart access system with push-button start.................... 22 1-5. Refueling .......................... 67 Moon roof ................................... 63 Opening the fuel tank cap ...... 67 Wireless remote control......... 34 Doors ............................................ 37 Trunk .............................................. 41 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel).............. 43 Front seats................................... 43 1-6. Theft deterrent system............................. 70 Engine immobilizer system........................................ 70 Alarm............................................ 72 Theft prevention labels (for USA) ................................... 74 Driving position memory........ 44 Seat position memory.............. 47 1-7. Safety information........... 75 Head restraints .......................... 49 Correct driving posture ......... 75 Seat belts .................................... 50 SRS airbags ................................ 77 Steering wheel........................... 56 Front passenger occupant classification system.............. 88 Anti-glare inside rear view mirror......................................... 57 Outside rear view mirrors..... 58 Child restraint systems ........... 93 Installing child restraints......... 97 19 1-1. Key information Keys The following keys are provided with the vehicle. Electronic keys • Operating the smart access system with push-button start (P. 22) • Operating the wireless remote control function (P. 34) Mechanical keys Key number plate Using the mechanical key Take out the mechanical key. After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. ■ When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant Turn the trunk opener main switch OFF and lock the glove box and the armrest door as circumstances demand. (P. 41, 252, 270) Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only. ■ Key number plate Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key number plate. (P. 399) 20 1-1. Key information NOTICE ■ To prevent key damage ● Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high temperatures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet. 1 ● Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that Before driving blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface. ● Do not disassemble the electronic key. 21 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Smart access system with push-button start The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. (The driver should always carry the electronic key.) Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 23) Unlocks the trunk (P. 23) Starts the engine (P. 116) 22 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Locking and unlocking the doors Press the lock button to lock the door. Grip the handle to unlock the door. Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle. The door cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the door is locked. Unlocking the trunk Press and hold the button to unlock the trunk. 23 1 Before driving Pressing and holding the button closes the windows and standard moon roof. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Antenna location and effective range ■ Antenna location Antennas outside cabin Antennas inside cabin Antenna inside trunk Antenna outside trunk 24 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected) When locking or unlocking the doors When unlocking the trunk The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of the trunk release button. When starting the engine or changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle. 25 1 Before driving The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of any of the outside door handles. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.) 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Operation signals Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice) Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked. Windows and standard moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and standard moon roof are operating. ■ Door lock buzzer If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds for 10 seconds if an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more. ■ Conditions affecting operation The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control from operating properly: (Ways of coping: P. 400) ● When the electronic key battery is depleted ● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise ● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wire- less communication devices ● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metal- lic objects • Cards to which aluminum foil is attached • Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside • Metallic wallets or bags • Coins • Hand warmers made of metal • Media such as CDs and DVDs ● When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity 26 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ● When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves ■ Switching the door unlock function It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks. STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. STEP 2 When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and hold , , or on the key. for approximately 5 seconds while pushing The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.) Multi-information display Unlocking doors Beep Hold the driver's door handle to unlock only the driver's Exterior: Beeps three door times Hold the door handle except Interior: Pings once a driver’s door handle to unlock all doors Hold any door handle to unlock all doors Exterior: Beeps twice Interior: Pings once STEP 3 Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open one of the doors. is pressed, the doors If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set. In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 72) 27 1 Before driving • Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves • Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs) • Digital audio players • Portable game systems ● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Battery-saving function In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging. ● When the entry function has not been used for 2 weeks or more ● When the electronic key has been left within approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle for 10 minutes or more The system will resume operation when... ● The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch. ● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function. (P. 34) ● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 400) ■ Electronic key battery depletion ● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. ● The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used because the key always transmits radio waves. If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate, or the detection area becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. ( P. 334) ● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field. • • • • • • TVs Personal computers Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones Glass top ranges Table lamps ■ To operate the system properly Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle. Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.) 28 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Note for the entry function ● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases. ● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine if the electronic key is near the window. ● The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.) ● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door. ● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.) ● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again. ■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle. ■ Security feature If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again. 29 1 Before driving • The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked. • The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked. • The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the glove box when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes are changed. ● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Alarms and warning indicators A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning indications on the multi-information display. (P. 375) The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only alarms are sounded. Alarm Exterior alarm sounds once for 2 seconds Situation Correction procedure Tried to lock the doors using the entry function while the electronic key is still inside the passenger compartment Retrieve the electronic key from the passenger compartment and lock the doors again. Closed the trunk while the electronic key is still inside the trunk and all doors are locked Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid. Tried to exit the vehicle with the electronic key and lock Exterior alarm sounds once for 60 the doors without first turning the “ENGINE START STOP” seconds switch OFF Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and lock the doors again. Exterior alarm Tried to lock the vehicle using Close all of the doors sounds once for 10 the entry function while a and lock the doors seconds door is open again. Exterior alarm sounds once for 3 seconds and interior alarm sounds continuously 30 When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, an attempt was made Shift the shift lever to P. to open the door and exit the vehicle, and the shift lever was not in P. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Alarm Situation Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door. 1 Turned the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF while the Close the driver's door. driver's door is open ■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly ● Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 400) ● Starting the engine:P. 116 ■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted P. 334 ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. smart access system with push-button start) can be deactivated. (Customizable features P. 435) ■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start For vehicles sold in the USA FCC ID: NI4TMLF-3 NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 31 Before driving Turned the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode while the driver's door is open (Opened the driver's door Interior alarm pings when the “ENGINE START continuously STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY mode.) Correction procedure 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 32 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk CAUTION ■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices ● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away ● User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. Ask your Lexus dealer for details for disabling the entry function. 33 1 Before driving from the smart access system antennas. (P. 24) The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Wireless remote control The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle and the trunk from outside the vehicle. Locks all doors Unlocks all doors Opens the windows and standard moon roof (push and hold) Unlocks the trunk (push and hold) Sounds alarm (push and hold) (P. 72) ■ 2-step unlocking function When you push the button, the driver's door is unlocked. Pushing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors. ■ Operation signals Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice) Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked. Windows and standard moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and standard moon roof are operating. ■ Door lock buzzer If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds for 10 seconds if an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more. ■ Electronic key battery depletion P. 28 ■ Security feature P. 29 34 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted P. 334 ■ Conditions affecting operation P. 26 1 ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer ■ Certification for wireless remote control For vehicles sold in the USA NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. 35 Before driving Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 435) 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 36 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Doors The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control or door lock switch. ■ Entry function P. 22 1 Before driving ■ Wireless remote control P. 34 ■ Door lock switch Locks all doors Unlocks all doors ■ Inside lock button Locks the door Unlocks the door The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position. 37 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Locking the front doors from the outside without a key The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle. Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked. Rear door child-protector lock The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the locks are set. These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors. Automatic door locking and unlocking systems The following functions can be set or cancelled: 38 Function Operation Shift position linked door locking function Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors. Shift position linked door unlocking function Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors. Speed linked door locking function All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher. Driver's door linked door unlocking function All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is opened within 10 seconds after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Setting and canceling the functions To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below: STEP 1 The shift lever and switch positions corresponding to the desired function to be set or canceled are shown as follows. Function Shift position linked door locking function Shift position linked door unlocking function Shift lever position Switch position P Speed linked door locking function Driver's door linked door unlocking function N When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked and then unlocked. 39 1 Before driving STEP 2 Close all the doors and switch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform the step 2 within 10 seconds.) Shift the shift lever to P or N, and press and hold the driver's door lock switch ( or ) for approximately 5 seconds and then release. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Impact detection door lock release system In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate. ■ Using the mechanical key The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 400) ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 435) CAUTION ■ To prevent an accident Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle. Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Always use a seat belt. ● Always lock all doors. ● Ensure that all doors are properly closed. ● Do not pull the inside handle while driving. ● Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat. 40 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Trunk The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless remote control. ■ Trunk opener 1 Release the trunk lid. Before driving ■ Entry function P. 22 ■ Wireless remote control P. 34 Locking the trunk opener feature Turn the main switch in the glove box OFF to disable the trunk opener. ON OFF The trunk lid cannot be opened even with the trunk opener, the wireless remote control or the entry function. 41 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Trunk handle Use the trunk handle when closing the trunk. ■ Internal trunk release lever The trunk lid can be opened by pulling down on the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of trunk lid. The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed. ■ Trunk light The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened. CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Keep the trunk lid closed. This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle. ■ When children are in the vehicle Never leave children unattended in the vehicle as they may lock themselves in the vehicle or trunk, which could cause the child to overheat or suffocate, resulting in death or serious injury. 42 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Front seats 1 Before driving Seat position switch Seatback angle switch Seat cushion (front) angle switch Vertical height adjustment switch Lumbar support switch Seat leg support adjusting switch (driver’s seat) (if equipped) CAUTION ■ Seat adjustment Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. 43 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Driving position memory (if equipped) Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked. Two different driving positions can be entered into memory. ■ Entering a position to memory Check that the shift lever is set in P. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions. While pushing the SET button, push button 1 or 2 until the signal beeps. If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten. ■ Recalling the memorized position Check that the shift lever is set in P. STEP 1 STEP 2 44 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode. Push button 1 or 2 to recall the memorized position. 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation Record your driving position to button 1 or 2 before performing the following. STEP 1 The driving position is recalled when the driver's door is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control and the driver’s door is opened. STEP 3 Open one of the doors. If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set. In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 72) ■ Canceling the linked door unlock operation STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door. STEP 2 While pushing the SET button, press on the wireless remote con- trol until the signal beeps. ■ Retained accessory power Memorized positions (except for the steering wheel positions) can be activated up to 30 seconds after the driver's door is opened, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. 45 1 Before driving STEP 2 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door. While pressing the desired button (1 or 2), press on the wireless remote control until the signal beeps. 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ To cancel seat position recall Perform any of the following operations. ● Push the SET button. ● Push button 1 or 2. ● Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall). ■ If the battery is disconnected The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected. CAUTION ■ Seat adjustment caution Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel. 46 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Seat position memory (if equipped) Your preferred front passenger seat position can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a button. Two different seat positions can be entered into memory. 1 ■ Entering a position to memory Check that the shift lever is set in P. STEP 2 STEP 3 Before driving STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode. Adjust the front passenger seat to the desired position. While pushing the SET button, push button 1 or 2 until the signal beeps. If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten. ■ Recalling the memorized position Check that the shift lever is set in P. Push button 1 or 2 to recall the memorized position. 47 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ Retained accessory power Memorized position can be activated up to 30 seconds after the front passenger door is opened, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. ■ To cancel seat position recall Perform any of the following operations. ● Push the SET button. ● Push button 1 or 2. ● Adjust the seat position using the switches. ■ If the battery is disconnected The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected. CAUTION ■ Seat adjustment caution Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger. 48 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Head restraints Vertical adjustment Push and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint. Removal Before driving Lock release button 1 Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button. ■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears. ■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraints Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using. CAUTION ■ Head restraint precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat. ● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times. ● Do not drive with the head restraints removed. 49 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Seat belts Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. ■ Correct use of the seat belts ● Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder. ● Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips. ● Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat. ● Do not twist the seat belt. ■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt Fastening the belt Push the tab into the buckle until a clicking sound is heard. Releasing the belt Press the release button. Release button 50 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats) Down Up 1 Before driving Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click. Seat belt comfort guide (outside rear seats) If the shoulder belt sits close to a person’s neck, slide the seat belt comfort guide forward. Seat belt pretensioners (front and outside rear seats) The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision. The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a side impact or a rear impact. 51 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system) When the pre-collision sensor detects an obstacle and determines that a collision is unavoidable, the seat belts lessen collision injury by retracting the slack in the front seat belts before the collision, thus restraining the driver and passenger at an earlier stage. The seat belts will also operate in the event of sudden braking. (P. 162) ■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR) The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully. ■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR) When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 97) ■ Pregnant women Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 50) Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area. If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision. 52 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ People suffering illness Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. ■ Child seat belt usage The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size. ● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child become ● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 50 regarding seat belt usage. ■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions. ■ Seat belt extender If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge. 53 Before driving large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 93) 1 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) CAUTION Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident. Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury. ■ Wearing a seat belt ● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt. ● Always wear a seat belt properly. ● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children. ● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system. ● Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. ● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm. ● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips. ■ Seat belt pretensioners ● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision. ● If the pretensioner has activated, the seat belt becomes locked: it cannot be fur- ther extended, nor will it return to the stowed position. The seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer. 54 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) CAUTION ■ Seat belt damage and wear ● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door. 1 ● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. ● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. ● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage. ● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Using a seat belt extender ● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender. ● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or injury in the event of a collision. ● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended. NOTICE ■ When using a seat belt extender When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself. 55 Before driving Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury. 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position while the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. Up Down Away from the driver Toward the driver Auto tilt away When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF, the steering wheel returns to its stowed position by moving up and away to enable easier driver entry and exit. Turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode will return the steering wheel to the original position. CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. 56 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Anti-glare inside rear view mirror In AUTO mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and automatically reduces the reflected light. Turns AUTO mode ON/OFF 1 The indicator comes on when AUTO mode is turned ON. Before driving The anti-glare mirror default mode is AUTO. The anti-glare mirror is automatically set to AUTO whenever the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned on. ■ To prevent sensor error To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover it. CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. 57 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Outside rear view mirrors Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. Select a mirror to adjust (L: left or R: right) Adjust the mirror up, down, in, or out using the switch ■ When the mirrors are fogged up Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 191) ■ Folding back the mirrors Push back in the direction of the vehicle's rear. ■ One-touch adjustment of the mirror angle (vehicles with driving position memory) A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and adjusted with the touch of a button. (P. 44) 58 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ Linked mirror function when reversing (vehicles with driving position memory) The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (between L and R). 1 ■ Auto anti-glare function CAUTION ■ When driving the vehicle Observe the following precautions while driving. Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. ● Do not drive with the mirrors folded back. ● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving. ■ When the mirror defoggers are operating Do not touch the surface of the mirror, as it may be hot. 59 Before driving When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to AUTO mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (P. 57) 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Power windows The power windows can be opened and closed using the following switches. Closing One-touch closing* Opening One-touch opening* *: Pushing the switch in the oppo- site direction will stop window travel partway. Lock switch Press the switch down to lock passenger window switches. Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window. 60 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof ■ The power windows can be operated when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Linked door lock window operation 1 ● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 400) 34) ● The power windows can be closed using the entry function. (P. 22) ■ Operating the power windows after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. ■ Jam protection function If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 435) 61 Before driving ● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof CAUTION ■ Closing the windows Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated. ● Do not allow children to operate the power windows. Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death. ■ Jam protection function ● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally. ● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes. 62 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Moon roof Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and down. ■ Opening and closing Standard type 1 Open Before driving The moon roof stops slightly before the fully opened position. Push the switch again to fully open. Close Push the switch in the either direction to stop the moon roof partway. Glass type Open Close (push and hold) The moon roof stops once. Push and hold the switch again to fully close. 63 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof ■ Tilting up and down Standard type Tilt up Tilt down Push the switch in the either side to stop the moon roof partway. Glass type Tilt up Push the switch in the either side to stop the moon roof partway. Tilt down (push and hold) 64 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof ■ The moon roof can be operated when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Linked door lock moon roof operation (standard type) ● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 400) ● The moon roof can be closed using the entry function. (P. 22) ■ Operating the moon roof after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. ■ Jam protection function If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly. ■ To reduce moon roof wind noise (standard type) Drive with the moon roof opened to slightly before the fully open position as driving with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind noise. ■ Sunshade The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 435) 65 Before driving ● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 34) 1 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof CAUTION ■ Opening the moon roof Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury. ● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving. ● Do not sit on top of the moon roof. ■ Closing the moon roof Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated. ● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof. Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury. ■ Jam protection function ● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally. ● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes. 66 1-5. Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap. ■ Before refueling the vehicle Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed. 1 STEP 1 Open the fuel filler door. STEP 2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open. STEP 3 Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door. Before driving ■ Opening the fuel tank cap 67 1-5. Refueling Closing the fuel tank cap When replacing the fuel tank cap, turn it until a clicking sound is heard. After releasing your hand, the cap will turn slightly to the opposite direction. ■ Fuel types Use unleaded gasoline. (91 Octane rating [Research Octane Number 96] or higher) ■ Fuel tank capacity Approximately 18.5 gal. (70 L, 15.4 Imp. gal.) ■ When the fuel filler door opener is inoperable The lever can be used to open the fuel filler door if the fuel filler door cannot be opened using the inside switch because the battery is discharged or for any other reason. 68 1-5. Refueling CAUTION ■ Refueling the vehicle Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so, may result in death or serious injury. 1 ● Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity. ● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury. ● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to come close to an open fuel tank. ● Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled. ● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire. ● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard. ■ When replacing the fuel cap Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ Refueling Do not spill fuel during refueling. Failing to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface. 69 Before driving Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to ignite. 1-6. Theft deterrent system Engine immobilizer system The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer. Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. The indicator light flashes after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been turned OFF to indicate that the system is operating. ■ System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type of engine immobilizer system. ■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction ● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object ● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle ■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system For vehicles sold in the USA FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 70 1-6. Theft deterrent system CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 1 ■ To prevent damage to the key Do not modify, remove or disable the engine immobilizer system. If any unauthorized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed. 71 Before driving NOTICE 1-6. Theft deterrent system Alarm The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry is detected. Close the moon roof and all windows. Stop the engine. The engine immobilizer system causes the indicator light to flash. After all people exit out of the vehicle, close the doors, trunk and hood, and lock all doors. The indicator light comes on. The indicator light changes from being on to a flashing pattern when the alarm system is set. Deactivating or stopping the alarm Do one of the following: ● Unlock the doors or trunk using the entry function or the wireless remote door lock function. ● Start the engine. ■ Items to check before locking the vehicle To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, check that there is no one in the vehicle, and that all windows and moon roof are closed before locking the vehicle. 72 1-6. Theft deterrent system ■ Panic mode To stop the alarm, push any button on the wireless remote control. ■ When the battery is disconnected Be sure to cancel the alarm system. If the battery is discharged before canceling the alarm, the system may be triggered when the battery is reconnected. 73 1 Before driving When is pushed for longer than about one second, the headlights/tail lights/emergency flashers will flash, the front and rear interior lights will come on, and an alarm will sound for about 60 seconds to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle. 1-6. Theft deterrent system Theft prevention labels (for USA) These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law. 74 1-7. Safety information Correct driving posture Drive in a good posture as follows: Sit upright and well back in the seat. (P. 43) Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (P. 43) Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable. Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest. (P. 56) Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (P. 49) Wear the seat belt correctly. (P. 50) 1 Before driving 75 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ While driving ● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. ● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger. ● Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged. ■ Adjusting the seat position: ● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat. ● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism. 76 1-7. Safety information SRS airbags The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury. 1 Before driving Front airbags Driver airbag/front passenger airbag Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components. Knee airbags Can help provide driver and front passenger protection. Side and curtain shield airbags Side airbags Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants and rear seat outside occupants (if equipped). Curtain shield airbags Can help protect primarily the head of outside occupants. 77 1-7. Safety information Airbag system components Front passenger airbag Curtain shield airbags AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights Side airbags for the front passengers Side and curtain shield airbag sensors Curtain shield airbag sensors Side airbags for the rear outside passengers (if equipped) SRS warning light Driver airbag Driver's seat position sensor Knee airbags Driver's seat belt buckle switch Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch Airbag sensor assembly Occupant detection system (ECU and sensors) Front airbag sensors Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant classification sensor etc. 78 1-7. Safety information The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor. ■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) ● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating) SRS airbag. ● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted. ● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the seats, and parts of the front pillar, rear pillar and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot. ● The front windshield may crack. ■ Operating conditions (front airbags) ● The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the frontal impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 15 mph (25 km/h) collision when the vehicle impacts straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform. However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.). ● It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehi- cle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together. ● The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 88) 79 1 Before driving In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants. 1-7. Safety information ■ Operating conditions (side and curtain shield airbags) ● The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side. ● The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passen- ger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 88) ■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a colli- sion The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration. ● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface ● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole ● Landing hard or vehicle falling ■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags) The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur. ● Collision from the rear ● Collision from the side ● Vehicle rollover 80 1-7. Safety information ■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (side and curtain shield airbags) The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment. 1 ● Collision from the side to the vehicle body Before driving other than the passenger compartment ● Collision from the side at an angle The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision. ● Collision from the rear ● Collision from the front ● Vehicle rollover 81 1-7. Safety information ■ When to contact your Lexus dealer In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer. ● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated. ● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate. ● A portion of the doors is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate. ● The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. ● The portion of the containing the side air- bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. ● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. 82 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. 1 ● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. ● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises: Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature. • If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck. The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls. 83 Before driving The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts. 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions ● If the seat belt extender has been con- nected to the driver's seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the driver's seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system will judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the driver's airbag may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender. ● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright. ● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri- ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children. (P. 93) 84 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions ● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard. SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger. ● Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or passenger have items resting on their knees. ● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars. ● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas- senger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle. 85 Before driving ● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the 1 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions ● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the instrument panel. These items can become projectiles when SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy. ● Do not attach anything to areas such as the door, windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist grip. ● If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploys, be sure to remove it. ● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. ● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components shown on P. 78. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction. ● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot. ● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation. ● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer. 86 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components ● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags ● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails ● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment ● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.) ● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system ● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players ● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability 87 1 Before driving Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbag may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury. 1-7. Safety information Front passenger occupant classification system Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger. With navigation system Without navigation system SRS warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light AIR BAG OFF indicator light AIR BAG ON indicator light 88 1-7. Safety information Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system ■ Adult*1 ■ Child *3 or child restraint system*4 AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights Indicator/ SRS warning light warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the right side passenger seats Devices Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Front passenger knee airbag Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner AIR BAG OFF*5 Off Flashing*2 Deactivated Activated Deactivated Activated 89 1 Before driving AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator AIR BAG ON lights Indicator/ SRS warning light Off warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2 Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the right side passenger seats Devices Activated Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Front passenger knee airbag Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner 1-7. Safety information ■ Unoccupied Indicator/ warning light Devices AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator Not illuminated lights SRS warning light Off Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Deactivated Side airbag on the right side passenger seats Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Activated Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner ■ There is a malfunction in the system Indicator/ warning light Devices AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator AIR BAG OFF lights SRS warning light On Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off Front passenger airbag Deactivated Side airbag on the right side passenger seats Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Activated Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated *1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/ her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture. *2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt. *3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture. 90 1-7. Safety information *4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 93) *5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for installing the child restraint system properly. (P. 97) ■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ● Wear the seat belt properly. ● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat. ● Make sure the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag, side airbag on the front passenger side and front passenger knee airbag may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision. ● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat. ● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs. ● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat. ● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the AIR BAG OFF indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system. 91 Before driving CAUTION 1 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions ● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illu- minated. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator still remain illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward. ● When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (P. 97) ● Do not modify or remove the front seats. ● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately. ● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat- backs. ● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface. ● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat. 92 1-7. Safety information Child restraint systems A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. The laws of the Canada and all 50 states of the USA now require the use of child restraint systems. 1 Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat. ● Choose a child restraint system appropriate to the age and size of the child. ● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system. General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 97) Types of child restraints Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child. Infant seat 93 Before driving Points to remember 1-7. Safety information Convertible seat Booster seat ■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system Get an appropriate child restraint system for the child. If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 50) 94 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ Child restraint precautions ● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must ● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. ● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. ● A forward-facing child restraint system should allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible even if AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured. ● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision. ● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. ● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident. 95 1 Before driving be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior. 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ When the child restraint system is not in use ● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment. ● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. 96 1-7. Safety information Installing child restraints Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the rear seats using a seat belt or child restraint lower anchorage. Attach the top strap when installing a child restraint. 1 Before driving Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver’s seat belt) (P. 50) Child restraint lower anchorages Lower anchorages are provided for the outside rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchorages are attached to the seats.) Anchor bracket (for top strap) Anchor brackets are provided for all rear seats. 97 1-7. Safety information Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt) ■ Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat Place the child seat on the rear STEP 1 seat facing the rear of the vehicle. STEP 2 Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. STEP 3 Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the ALR lock mode. Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only. 98 1-7. Safety information STEP 4 While pushing the child seat down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place. ■ Forward facing Convertible seat STEP 1 Place the child seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle. STEP 2 Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. STEP 3 Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly into the ALR lock mode. Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only. 99 1 Before driving After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. 1-7. Safety information STEP 4 While pushing the child seat into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place. After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. ■ Booster seat STEP 1 Place the booster seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle. STEP 2 Sit the child in the booster seat. Fit the seat belt to the booster seat according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder, and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (P. 50) 100 1-7. Safety information Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt. 1 Before driving Installation with child restraint lower anchorages STEP 1 Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly. Type A Latch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages. STEP 2 Canada only 101 1-7. Safety information Type B Latch the buckles onto the anchorages. STEP 2 Canada only If the child restraint has a top strap, the top strap should be latched onto the anchorages. (P. 102) For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. Child restraint systems with a top strap STEP 1 102 Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or a lower anchors, and lock the head restraint in place at the lowest position. 1-7. Safety information STEP 2 Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap. Make sure the top strap is securely latched. 1 Before driving ■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages Anchorages conform to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used. This vehicle is designed to confirm to the SAE J1819. CAUTION ■ When installing a booster seat Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock mode: (P. 52) ● ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to the child. ● Do not allow the child to play with the seat belt or the child could be killed or seri- ous injured. 103 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ When installing a child restraint system Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place. If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking or an accident. ● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat. ● Only put a forward facing or booster child seat on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forward facing or booster child seat on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate). ● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi- tioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking. ● Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted. ● Push and pull the child seat in different directions to be sure it is secure. ● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac- turer. 104 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ Do not use a seat belt extender If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a collision. When using the lower anchorages, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchorages and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. 105 Before driving ■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchorages 1 1-7. Safety information 106 When driving 2-1. Driving procedures ....... 108 2 Driving the vehicle................. 108 2-4. Using other driving systems........................... 141 Engine (ignition) switch.......... 116 Cruise control........................... 141 Automatic Transmission......... 119 Turn signal lever....................... 122 Dynamic radar cruise control ..................................... 144 Parking brake........................... 123 Intuitive parking assist........... 153 Driving assist systems............ 159 2-2. Instrument cluster .......... 124 Gauges and meters................ 124 PCS (Pre-Collision System) ........ 162 Indicators and warning lights ......................................... 126 2-5. Driving information........ 165 Multi-information display..... 130 Cargo and luggage ................ 165 Vehicle load limits................... 168 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers......... 134 Winter driving tips................... 169 Headlight switch...................... 134 Dinghy towing.......................... 182 Trailer towing ............................ 175 Fog light switch ........................ 137 Windshield wipers and washer ..................................... 138 107 2-1. Driving procedures Driving the vehicle The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving. ■ Starting the engine (P. 117) ■ Driving STEP 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (P. 119) STEP 2 Release the parking brake. (P. 123) Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. ■ Stopping STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake. STEP 3 When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N. (P. 119) ■ Parking the vehicle STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. STEP 2 Set the parking brake. (P. 123) STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 119) STEP 4 Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch and stop the engine. STEP 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person. Starting on a steep uphill STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 108 Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D. Gently depress the accelerator pedal. Release the parking brake. 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Driving in the rain ● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery. ● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery. ● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly. 2 ■ Breaking in your new Lexus ● For the first 200 miles (300 km): Avoid sudden stops. ● For the first 600 miles (1000 km): • • • • Do not drive at extremely high speeds. Avoid sudden acceleration. Do not drive continuously in the low gears. Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods. ■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down. ■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (P. 412) ■ Normal characteristics after turning off the engine Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction. 109 When driving To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to observe: 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ■ When starting the vehicle Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping. ■ When driving the vehicle ● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal. • Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. • When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly. • Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly. • Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident. ● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials. ● Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R. Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle. ● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. ● Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to P, R or N while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission system and may result in a loss of vehicle control. ● Do not shift the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the engine brake to not operate properly and lead to an accident. 110 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ● Do not turn the engine off while driving. The power steering and brake booster systems will not operate properly if the engine is not running. ● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 119) ● When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to ● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious injury. ● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury. ● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds. ■ When driving on slippery road surfaces ● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident. ● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident. ● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident. ■ When shifting the shift lever Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury. 111 When driving prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident. 2 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ■ When the vehicle is stopped ● Do not race the engine. If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident. ● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior. ● Always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the engine is running to prevent an accident caused by the vehicle moving. ■ When the vehicle is parked ● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi- cle when it is in the sun. Failure to do so may result in the following. • Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire. • The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack. • Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components. ● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running. ● Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off. Doing so may cause burns. ● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. 112 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ■ Exhaust gases Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard. ● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. ● The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by ■ When taking a nap in the vehicle Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard. ■ When braking the vehicle ● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously. Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle. ● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase. ● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes. ● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer. Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately. 113 When driving corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. 2 2-1. Driving procedures NOTICE ■ While driving the vehicle Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals together to hold the vehicle on a hill. ■ When parking the vehicle Always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed. ■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts ● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long time. Doing so may damage the power steering pump ● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag- ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc. ■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators) Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible. The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed. It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or that of the brake discs are exceeded. ■ If you get a flat tire while driving A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle. ● It may be difficult to control your vehicle. ● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds. ● The vehicle will behave abnormally. Replace a flat tire with a new one. (P. 389) 114 2-1. Driving procedures NOTICE ■ When encountering flooded roads Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle. ● Engine stalling ● Short in electrical components ● Engine damage caused by water immersion ● Brake function ● Changes in quantity and quality of engine oil, transaxle fluid, etc. ● Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc. 115 2 When driving In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Lexus dealer check the following. 2-1. Driving procedures Engine (ignition) switch Modes can be switched by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch when carrying the electronic key on your person. (The engine can be started in any mode by operating the switch at the same time as depressing the brake pedal.) ■ Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode OFF* Emergency flashers can be used. ACCESSORY mode Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used. The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns amber. IGNITION ON mode All electrical components can be used. The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns amber. *: The engine cannot be turned off unless the shift lever is in P. 116 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Starting the engine STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set. STEP 2 Check that the shift lever is set in P. STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal. The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green. STEP 4 Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. 2 When driving ■ If the engine does not start The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 70) ■ When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. ■ Auto power OFF function If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn off. 117 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Electronic key battery depletion P. 28 ■ When the electronic key battery is discharged P. 334 ■ Conditions affecting operation P. 26 ■ Note for the entry function P. 29 CAUTION ■ When starting the engine Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not press the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Stopping the engine in an emergency If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds. However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving except in an emergency. If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to an unexpected accident. NOTICE ■ To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods without the engine running. ■ When starting the engine ● Do not race a cold engine. ● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately. 118 2-1. Driving procedures Automatic Transmission Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions. ■ Shifting the shift lever While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever. 2 When driving ■ Shift position uses Shift position Function P Parking the vehicle or starting the engine R Reversing N Neutral D Normal driving*1 S S mode driving*2 (P. 120) *1: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D position for normal driving. *2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible gear ranges, controls engine braking forces. 119 2-1. Driving procedures Changing shift ranges in S mode Shift the shift lever to the S position and operate the shift lever. Upshifting Downshifting The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to 5 or 4 according to vehicle speed. ■ Shift ranges and their functions Shift range Function 6 Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. 5 Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 5 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. 4 Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 4 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. 3 Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 3 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. 2 Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 2 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. 1 Setting the gear at 1. A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift range. 120 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (in the S mode) To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will sound twice.) ■ When driving with the cruise control system or dynamic radar cruise control sys- tem The engine brake will not operate in the S mode, even when downshifting to 5 or 4. (P. 141, 144) 2 ■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P ■ If the indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to S This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. (In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.) ■ AI-SHIFT (Artificial Intelligence Shift) The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the optimal position according to the driver performance and driving conditions. The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.) 121 When driving P. 398 2-1. Driving procedures Turn signal lever Left turn Right turn Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change The left hand signal will flash until you release the lever. Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change The right hand signal will flash until you release the lever. ■ Turn signals can be operated when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ If the indicators flash faster than usual Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out. 122 2-1. Driving procedures Parking brake Canada USA Sets the parking brake* (Depressing the pedal again releases the parking brake.) *: Fully depress the parking brake pedal with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right foot. 2 ■ Before driving Fully release the parking brake. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear. 123 When driving NOTICE 2-2. Instrument cluster Gauges and meters The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may differ depending on the model/type. The following gauges, meters and display illuminate when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. Tachometer Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Multi-information display P. 130 Speedometer Displays the vehicle speed. Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed. Fuel gauge Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank. 124 2-2. Instrument cluster Odometer and trip meter ● Odometer Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven. ● Trip meter Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently. 2 Engine coolant temperature gauge Displays the engine coolant temperature. When driving Instrument panel light control The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted. Brighter Darker When the headlight switch is turned to ON, the brightness will be reduced slightly unless the control dial is turned fully up. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components ● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi- cates the maximum engine speed. ● The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 405) 125 2-2. Instrument cluster Indicators and warning lights The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems. Instrument cluster The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may differ depending on the model/type. 126 2-2. Instrument cluster Center panel (without navigation system) 2 When driving Center panel (with navigation system) 127 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ Indicators The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems. Turn signal indicator (P. 122) Headlight high beam indicator (P. 134) Cruise control indicator (P. 141) * AFS OFF indicator light (P. 135) (if equipped) Headlight indicator (P. 134) * Tail light indicator (P. 134) * Slip indicator (P. 159) (USA) (Canada) (without navigation system) Front fog light indicator (P. 137) * (with navigation system) Shift position and shift range indicators (P. 119) 128 SRS airbag on-off indicator (P. 88) SRS airbag on-off indicator (P. 88) 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ Warning lights Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions or suspected problem in any of the vehicle’s systems. (P. 364) * * * (USA) * * (USA) * (Canada) * (Canada) * * (USA) * (Canada) * (if equipped) 2 (with navigation system) When driving (without navigation system) *: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. CAUTION ■ If a safety system warning light does not come on Should a safety system light such as ABS and SRS airbag warning lights not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs. 129 2-2. Instrument cluster Multi-information display The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data, including the current outside air temperature. ● Trip information (P. 131) Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising related information. ● Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped) (P. 153) Automatically displayed when using intuitive parking assist. ● Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped) (P. 144) Automatically displayed when using dynamic radar cruise control. ● Warning messages (P. 375) Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle’s systems. 130 2-2. Instrument cluster Trip information Type A Display items can be switched by pushing the DISP switch. 2 When driving Type B ■ Outside temperature Displays the outside air temperature. The temperature range that can be displayed in the following range. USA: from -40 to 122 °F Canada: from -40 to 50 °C 131 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ Driving range Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining. • This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed. • When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated. ■ Average fuel consumption Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset. The function can be reset by pushing the DISP switch for longer than one second when the average fuel consumption is displayed. ■ Average fuel consumption after refueling Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled. ■ Current fuel consumption Displays the current rate of fuel consumption. ■ Average vehicle speed Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine was started or the function was reset. The function can be reset by pushing the DISP switch for longer than one second when the average vehicle speed is displayed. 132 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ System check display After switching the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode, is displayed while system operation is checked. When the system check is complete, is displayed before returning to the normal screen. NOTICE 2 ■ The multi-information display at low temperatures 133 When driving Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed. 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Headlight switch The headlights can be operated manually or automatically. USA Canada The side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on. The headlights and all lights listed above turn on. The headlights and parking lights turn on and off automatically. (When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode) Turning on the high beam headlights With the headlights on, push the lever forward to turn on the high beams. Pull the lever back to the center position to turn the high beams off. Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams. Release to turn them off. You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off. 134 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers AFS (vehicles with discharge headlights) AFS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) improves visibility at intersections and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of light axis of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire angle that are controlled by steering input. Operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher. ■ Deactivating AFS 2 OFF ON ■ Daytime running light system To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night. ■ Headlight control sensor The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield. Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight control system to malfunction. 135 When driving Turn the switch OFF to deactivate AFS. 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers ■ Automatic light off system ● When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after all doors are closed with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. (The light turns off immediately if the button on the key is pressed after all doors are locked.) ● When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF and driver’s door is opened. To turn the lights on again, switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch OFF once and then back to the or position. ■ Automatic headlight leveling system (vehicles with discharge headlights) The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users. ■ If the indicator flashes... (vehicles with discharge headlights) It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 435) NOTICE ■ To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 136 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Fog light switch The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam. OFF Fog lights ON 2 When driving 137 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Windshield wipers and washer ■ Intermittent wiper with interval adjuster (if equipped) Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation (when INT is selected). Intermittent windshield wiper interval increases Intermittent windshield wiper interval decreases Intermittent windshield wiper operation (INT) Low speed windshield wiper operation (LO) High speed windshield wiper operation (HI) Temporary operation (MIST) Wash/wipe operation Wipers operate automatically. 138 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers ■ Rain-sensing windshield wipers (if equipped) With AUTO selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed. Sensor sensitivity (-) With AUTO selected, wiper response to falling rain is less sensitive. 2 When driving Sensor sensitivity (+) With AUTO selected, wiper response to falling rain is more sensitive. Rain-sensing windshield wiper operation (AUTO) Low speed windshield wiper operation (LO) High speed windshield wiper operation (HI) Temporary operation (MIST) Wash/wipe operation Wipers operate automatically. (With AUTO selected, after operating several times, the wipers operate one more time after a short delay to prevent dripping.) ■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. 139 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers ■ Rain drop sensor (vehicles equipped with the rain-sensing windshield wipers) The sensor judges the amount of raindrops. ■ AUTO mode If the wiper switch is turned to AUTO position while the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wiper will operate once to show that AUTO mode is activated. ■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir. CAUTION ■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode (vehicles equipped with the rain-sensing windshield wipers) The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers. NOTICE ■ When the windshield is dry Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield. ■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually. 140 2-4. Using other driving systems Cruise control (if equipped) Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelerator. ■ Set the vehicle speed STEP 1 Turn the ON-OFF button ON. Push the button once more to deactivate the cruise control. 2 When driving STEP 2 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and press the lever down to set the cruise control speed. ■ Adjusting the speed setting Increase speed Decrease speed Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is obtained. 141 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Canceling and resuming regular acceleration Cancel Push the lever towards you to cancel cruise control. The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied. Resume To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up. ■ Fine adjustment of the set speed Fine adjustment of the set speed (approximately 1.0 mph [1.6 km/h]) can be made by lightly pressing the lever up or down and releasing it. ■ Cruise control can be set when ● The shift lever is in the D or 4,5, or 6 range of S. ● Vehicle speed is between approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h). ■ Accelerating The vehicle can be accelerated normally. ■ Automatic cruise control cancellation The set speed is automatically cancelled in any of the following situations. ● Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained. ● Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40km/h) ● VSC is activated 142 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes Turn the ON-OFF button off once, and then reactivate the system. If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. CAUTION ■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation 2 Keep the ON-OFF button off when not in use. Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause serious or fatal accident. ● In heavy traffic ● On roads with sharp bends ● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow ● On steep hills ● On winding roads 143 When driving ■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control 2-4. Using other driving systems Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped) Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead. ■ Select cruise mode Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode Turn the ON-OFF button ON. Push the button once more to deactivate. Selecting conventional constant speed control mode Turn the ON-OFF button ON. Push the button once more to deactivate. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is always reset when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to IGNITION ON mode. Switch to constant speed control mode. (push and hold for approximately one second) 144 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Driving in the selected cruise control mode Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed and press the lever down to set. 2 When driving ■ Adjusting the speed setting Increase speed Decrease speed To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is displayed. Fine Adjustment (1 mph increments) Momentarily move lever in desired direction and release Coarse adjustment (5 mph increments) Hold the lever in the desired direction. Coarse adjustment will continue to change the set speed approximately 5 mph per second until the lever is released. 145 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Canceling and resuming the speed setting Cancel Push the lever towards you to cancel cruise control. The setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied. Resume To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up. ■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance Each push of the switch changes Preceding the vehicle-to-vehicle distance vehicle mark Long Medium Short The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is automatically set to the long mode when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to IGNITION ON mode. A mark will be displayed to indicate the presence of the vehicle if a vehicle is running ahead of you. 146 2-4. Using other driving systems Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles within 328 ft. (100 m) ahead and to judge the distance between your vehicle and those vehicles. Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close when traveling on long downhill slopes. 2 When driving Example of constant speed cruising (when there are no vehicles ahead): When set to 62 mph (100 km/h) The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch. Example of deceleration cruising (when the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed): When fixed speed cruising is set at 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, in the same lane, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing on the vehicle ahead. 147 2-4. Using other driving systems Example of follow-up cruising (when following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed): When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver. Example of acceleration (when there are no longer vehicles driving slower than the set speed in the lane ahead): When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead driving at 50 mph (80 km/ h) is out of the lane When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowly accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached. The system then returns to fixed speed cruising. ■ Fine adjustment of the set speed Adjustment of the set speed by the following speed can be made by lightly pressing the lever up or down and releasing it. In the constant speed control mode: Approximately 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: USA: Approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) Canada:Approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) ■ Dynamic radar cruise control warning lights, messages and buzzers Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to alert you to the need for caution while driving. (P. 375) ■ The dynamic radar cruise can be set when ● The shift lever is in D or the 4, 5 or 6 range of S. ● Vehicle speed is between approximately 30 mph (45 km/h) and 85 mph (135 km/h). ■ Accelerating The vehicle can be accelerated normally. 148 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations. ● Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h) ● VSC is activated ● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.* ● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed.* *: Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving must be reset by turning the ON-OFF button on again. ■ Automatically cancelling constant speed control The set speed is automatically canceled in the following situations. ● Actual vehicle speed is more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained. ● Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h) ● VSC is activated ■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/ decreases in accordance with vehicle speed. Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance Long Approximately 210 ft. (65 m) Medium Approximately 150 ft. (45 m) Short Approximately 100 ft. (30 m) 149 When driving If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer. 2 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Radar sensor and grille cover Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice or plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.) Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected. Grille cover Radar sensor ■ Certification For vehicles sold in USA FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. FCC RF exposure information This device complies with the FCC RF exposure requirements. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 150 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION ■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. Be aware of the set vehicle speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes, etc. ■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation 2 Keep the ON-OFF button off when not in use. ■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control ● In heavy traffic ● On roads with sharp bends ● On winding roads ● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow. ● Where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients ● At entrances to expressways ● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, etc.) ● Where buzzer can be heard often 151 When driving Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause serious or fatal accident. 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION ■ When the radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in front of you. As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the proximity alarm (P. 375) will not be activated, and an accident may result. ● Vehicles that cut in suddenly ● Vehicles traveling at low speeds ● Vehicles that are not moving ● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.) ● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane ■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function correctly Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and an accident may result. ● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function- ing of the sensor ● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk, etc.) ● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow ● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable ■ To ensure the radar sensor functions correctly Do not do the following to the sensor or grille cover as doing so may cause the sensor not to function correctly and could result in an accident. ● Stick or attach anything to them ● Leave them dirty ● Disassemble, subject them to strong shocks ● Modify or paint them ● Replace them with non-genuine parts 152 2-4. Using other driving systems Intuitive parking assist (if equipped) The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated via the multi-information display and a buzzer when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage. Always check the surrounding area when using this system. For vehicles equipped with a navigation system, refer to the separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for further details. ■ Types of sensors 2 When driving Front corner sensors Rear corner sensors Back sensors ■ Multi-information display (P. 130) Front corner sensor operation Rear corner sensor operation Back sensor operation 153 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Intuitive parking assist switch ON/OFF When ON, an indicator on the switch comes on to inform the driver that the function is operational. The display and buzzer system ■ Corner sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) of an obstacle. Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) to 1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) from the obstacle Approximately 1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) to 0.8 ft. (25 cm) from the obstacle Flashing: Within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the obstacle 154 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Back sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) of an obstacle. ■ Buzzer operation and distance to the obstacle A buzzer sounds when the corner sensors and back sensor are operating. ● The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle. When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the buzzer sounds continuously. • Corner sensors: Approximately 0.8 ft. (25 cm) • Back sensors: Approximately 1.2 ft. (35 cm) ● When two or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle. ● If multiple obstacles are detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) in front and behind the vehicle at the same time, the warning buzzer will change in the following manner: • If a continuous beep is sounding, and a new obstacle is detected near a different area of the vehicle, the warning buzzer will sound 6 beeps then one continuous beep. • If a continuous beep is sounding, and a new obstacle is detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of a different area of the vehicle, the warning buzzer will sound 2 beeps then one continuous beep. 155 2 When driving Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm) from the obstacle Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm) from the obstacle Approximately 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.2 ft. (35 cm) from the obstacle Flashing: Within 1.2 ft. (35 cm) of the obstacle 2-4. Using other driving systems Detection range of the sensors Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle. The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object etc. 156 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Sensor detection information ● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below. • • • • • • ● The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particu- lar attention to the following obstacles. • • • • • Wires, fences, ropes etc. Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb radio waves Sharply-angled objects Low obstacles Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle 157 2 When driving There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. The sensor is frozen. The sensor is covered in any way. The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side. On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves. • There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity. • The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain • The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna. • Towing eyelets are installed. • The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact. • The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb. • In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they are. 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ When the display flashes and a message is displayed P. 375 ■ Certification (Canada only) This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 435) CAUTION ■ Caution when using the intuitive parking assist Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident. ● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h). ● Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range. NOTICE ■ Notes when washing the vehicle Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area. Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning. 158 2-4. Using other driving systems Driving assist systems To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle. ■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface 2 ■ Brake assist When driving Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation. ■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces. ■ TRAC (Traction Control) Maintains drive power and prevents the front wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads. ■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped) P. 162 When the VSC and TRAC systems are operating If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, or if the front wheels spin, the slip indicator light flashes to indicate that the VSC and TRAC systems have been engaged. A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to indicate that VSC is operating. 159 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC systems ● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems. ● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operat- ing. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred. • • • • Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop. The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated. The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated. CAUTION Any of the following conditions may result in an accident which could cause death or serious injury: ■ The ABS does not operate effectively when ● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded. ● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road. ■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating will exceed that of normal condi- tions The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations. ● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads ● When driving with tire chains ● When driving over bumps in the road ● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads ■ TRAC may not operate effectively when Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating. Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost. 160 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION ■ When the slip indicator flashes and a warning buzzer sounds This situation occurs immediately while VSC is activated. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds. ■ Replacing tires Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire pressure level. 161 When driving The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels. 2 2-4. Using other driving systems PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped) Safety systems such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically engaged to lessen impact and injuries to occupants as well as vehicle damage when the radar sensor detects an unavoidable frontal collision. ■ Pre-collision seat belts The front seat belts are immediately retracted as the effect of the pretensioner is increased (P. 51), to provide even greater constraining force to protect the driver and passengers. In the event of sudden braking or skidding, the system will operate even if no obstacle has been detected. ■ Pre-collision brake assist Applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed. Radar sensor Detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and determines whether a collision is imminent based on the position, speed, and heading of the obstacles. Grille cover Radar sensor ■ Obstacles not detected The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts. 162 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ The pre-collision system is operational when ● Seat belt (linked to the radar sensor) • Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h). • The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming vehicle exceeds 18 to 24 mph (30 to 40 km/h). • The front occupants are wearing a seat belt. ● Seat belts (linked to brake operation) • Vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h). • The system detects sudden braking or skidding. • The front occupants are wearing a seat belt. ● Brake Assist 2 ■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of collision ● When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve ● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve ● When driving over a narrow iron bridge ● When there is a metal object on the road surface ● When driving on an uneven road surface ● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn ● When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten. ■ When there is a malfunction in the system Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 364, 375) 163 When driving • Vehicle speed is above 18 mph (30 km/h). • The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle is greater than 18 to 24 mph (30 to 40 km/h). • The brake pedal is depressed. 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION ■ Handling the radar sensor Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively. ● Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times. Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them. ● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area are subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer. ● Do not disassemble the sensor. ● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille guard or surrounding area. ■ Limitations of the pre-collision system Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards. 164 2-5. Driving information Cargo and luggage Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load. ● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sure all items are secured in place. ● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance. ● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight. 2 When driving Capacity and distribution Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants. (Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants) Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (1505) = 650 lbs.) (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 165 2-5. Driving information (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (P. 175) Example on your vehicle Cargo capacity Total load capacity When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 900 lb. (410 kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows: 900 lb. — 366 lb. = 534 lb. (410 kg —166 kg = 244 kg) In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb. (176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows: 534 lb. — 388 lb. = 146 lb. (244 kg — 176 kg = 68 kg) As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of the occupants who got on later, by an amount. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle. (P. 168) 166 2-5. Driving information CAUTION ■ Storage precautions ● Do not place anything on the package tray behind the rear seatback. Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident. ● Do not drive with objects on top of the instrument panel. They may interfere with the driver’s field of view or move during sharp acceleration or turning, thus impairing the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an accident they may injure the vehicle occupants. one during an accident or sudden braking. ■ Capacity and distribution ● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating. ● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury. 167 When driving ● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure some- 2 2-5. Driving information Vehicle load limits Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. ■ Total load capacity: 900 lb. (410 kg) Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. ■ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3) Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person. ■ Towing capacity: 1000 lb. (450 kg) ■ Cargo capacity Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants. ■ Total load capacity and seating capacity These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (P. 326) CAUTION ■ Overloading the vehicle Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident. 168 2-5. Driving information Winter driving tips Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions. ■ Pre-winter preparations ● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures. • Engine oil • Engine coolant • Washer fluid ● Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte. 2 When driving ● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires. Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires. ● Tire inflation pressure falls in winter as the outside temperature falls. Add 2.9 to 4.3 psi (20 to 30 kPa, 0.2 to 0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the standard tire inflation pressure. 169 2-5. Driving information ■ Before driving the vehicle Perform the following according to the driving conditions. ● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing. ● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield. ● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis. ● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes. ■ When driving the vehicle Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions. ■ When parking the vehicle Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. 170 2-5. Driving information Selecting snow chains Use the correct snow chain size when mounting the snow chains. Chain size is regulated for each tire sizes. Side chain 0.12 in. [3 mm] in diameter 1.18 in. [30 mm] in length 0.39 in. [10 mm] in width 2 When driving Cross chain 0.16 in. [4 mm] in diameter 0.98 in. [25 mm] in length 0.55 in. [14 mm] in width Regulations on the use of snow chains ● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains. ● Install the chains on the front tires. ● Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km). 171 2-5. Driving information Shifting the windshield wiper position You can shift the wipers to the rest position manually. (In heavy snow or icy condition etc.) Grip the hook section of the wiper arm firmly when shifting the wiper position. To rest position Raise the wiper in line with the windshield. You can stand the wipers up for the rest position. *: More than 3.9 in. (10 cm) To retract position Lower the wipers by pressing on the upper part of the hook section. 172 2-5. Driving information ■ Snow chain installation Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains. ● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location. ● Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on rear tires. ● Install the tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km). ● Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying instructions. ■ Driving with snow tires Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury. ● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle. ● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure. ● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used. ● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels. ■ Driving with snow chains Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury. ● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower. ● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes. ● Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling. ● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained. 173 When driving CAUTION 2 2-5. Driving information NOTICE ■ Repairing or replacing snow tires Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters. ■ Fitting tire chains The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted. 174 2-5. Driving information Trailer towing Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-carrying vehicle, thus towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of others, do not overload the vehicle or trailer. Lexus warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes ■ Weight limits Confirm the total trailer weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits. 2 When driving ■ Gross vehicle weight The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) indicated on the Certification Label. The gross vehicle weight is the sum weight of the unloaded vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer tongue load. Also included is the weight of any special equipment installed on your vehicle. ■ Gross axle weight The load on either the front or rear axle resulting from distribution of the gross vehicle weight on both axles must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed on the Certification Label. Certification label 175 2-5. Driving information ■ Trailer tongue load The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue load is 9 to 11% of the total trailer weight, not exceeding the maximum 100 lb. (45 kg). (Tongue load / Total trailer weight x 100 = 9 to 11%) The total trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing stations, building supply company, trucking company, junk yards, etc. Total trailer weight Tongue load Towing a trailer Consult your Lexus dealer for further information on additional requirements such as a towing kits, etc. 176 2-5. Driving information ■ Before towing ● Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (P. 326) ● Trailer tires should be inflated according to the trailer manufacturer's recom- mendation. ● All trailer lights work to be legal. ● Confirm all lights work each time you connect them. ● Check that your vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle is not level, and check for improper tongue load, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes. ● Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes. ■ Break-in schedule Lexus recommends that you do not use a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new power train components (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) to tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of driving. ■ Maintenance ● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. (See “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner's Manual Supplement/ Scheduled Maintenance”.) ● Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing. CAUTION ■ To avoid accident or injury ● The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus the weight of cargo) must not exceed 1000 lb. (450 kg). ● Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load capacities. ● Never load more weight in the back than in the front of the trailer. About 60% of the load should be in the front half of the trailer, and the remaining 40% in the rear. 177 When driving ● Make sure the trailer cargo is securely loaded. 2 2-5. Driving information CAUTION ■ Hitches Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the operator must never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer hitch. ● If you wish to install a trailer hitch, your Lexus dealer should be consulted. ● Use only a hitch that conforms to the total trailer weight requirement. ● Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer. ● Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coat of grease. ● Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After removing the hitch, seal any mounting holes in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle. ■ When towing a trailer ● Never tap into your vehicle's hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle's braking effectiveness. ● Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane. NOTICE ■ When installing a trailer hitch ● Use only the position recommended by your Lexus dealer. Do not install the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage. ● Do not use axle-mounted hitches, as they can cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires. ■ Brakes Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations. 178 2-5. Driving information NOTICE ■ Safety chain A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in the case that it becomes damaged or separated. For the correct safety chain installation procedure, ask your Lexus dealer. ■ Do not directly splice trailer lights 2 Trailer towing tips Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. The three main causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and improper trailer loading. Keep these in mind when towing. ● Before starting out, check the trailer’s lights and the vehicle-trailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance. ● Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the vehicle. ● Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice. Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to the right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident. ● As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-tovehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length. 179 When driving Directly splicing may damage your vehicle's electrical system and cause a malfunction. 2-5. Driving information ● Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces. ● Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration. ● Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making a turn. ● Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a larger than normal turning radius. ● Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Periodically check the rear to prepare for being passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel, reduce speed immediately but gradually, and steer straight ahead. Never increase speed. If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer will stabilize. ● Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes. ● In order to maintain efficient engine braking and electrical charging performance, do not use overdrive. Transmission shift range position must be in “4”, in the “S” mode. ● Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle's engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot. See “If you vehicle overheats”. (P. 405) 180 2-5. Driving information ● Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and the trailer wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the transmission in “P”. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so only after performing the following: STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 5 ● When restarting after parking on a slope: STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 With the transmission in the “P” position, start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake pedal pressed. Shift into “3”, “2”, “1”, or the “R” position (if reversing). Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes. Have someone retrieve the blocks. CAUTION ■ To avoid an accident ● Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) or posted towing speed limit, whichever is lower. As instability (swaying) of the towing vehicle-trailer combination increases as speed increases, exceeding 45 mph (72 km/h) may cause loss of control. ● Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden downshifts. ● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency. 181 2 When driving STEP 4 Apply the brakes and keep them applied. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels. When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load. Apply the parking brake firmly. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine. 2-5. Driving information Dinghy towing Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home. NOTICE ■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground. 182 Interior features 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ............... 184 Automatic air conditioning system ...................................... 184 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ................................ 191 3-2. Using the audio system............................ 192 Audio system type................... 192 Using the radio......................... 194 Using the CD player .............. 201 Playing back MP3 and WMA discs............................ 207 Optimal use of the audio system ...................................... 215 Using the AUX adapter........ 218 Using the steering wheel audio switches ....................... 219 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) ...... 221 Hands-free phone system features (for cellular phone) .............. 221 Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) ............. 224 Making a phone call ............. 232 Setting a cellular phone ....... 236 Security and system setup........................................ 240 3 Using the phone book .......... 243 3-4. Using the interior lights ............................. 249 Interior lights list .................... 249 • Front interior lights.............. 251 • Personal lights ...................... 251 3-5. Using the storage features ........................ 252 List of storage features......... 252 • Glove box.............................. 252 • Console box ......................... 253 • Overhead console.............. 255 • Cup holders.......................... 256 • Auxiliary box ........................ 258 3-6. Other interior features ........................ 259 Sun visors ................................. 259 Vanity mirror ........................... 260 Clock........................................... 261 Ashtray ..................................... 262 Cigarette lighter.................... 263 Power outlet ............................ 264 Seat heaters and ventilators ............................. 265 Armrest ..................................... 267 Rear sunshade ........................ 268 Extended trunk....................... 270 Floor mat .................................... 271 Trunk features......................... 272 Garage door opener ............. 274 Compass ................................... 279 183 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Automatic air conditioning system Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. With navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. Without navigation system Airflow display Automatic mode Front windshield defogger Off Outside air or recirculated air mode Fan speed display Passenger’s side temperature control Driver's side temperature control Driver’s side temperature setting display Air conditioning ON/OFF switch Changes the air outlets used Passenger’s side temperature setting display Dual operation switch Fan speed Using the automatic mode STEP 1 Press . The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. STEP 2 Press to switch to automatic mode. Automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes. 184 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger STEP 3 Press to increase the temperature and to decrease the temperature on the switch. The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set separately. Adjusting the settings ■ Adjusting the temperature setting Press to increase the temperature and to decrease the temperature on the switch. 3 switch to separately adjust the temperature for the passenger and driver sides (dual mode). Press to return the driver and passenger side temperatures to the same setting (simultaneous mode). The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is pressed. ■ Adjusting the fan speed Press (increase) or (decrease) on Press . to turn the fan off. 185 Interior features Press (increase) or (decrease) on the 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ■ Changing the air outlets Press or on the switch. The air outlets switch each time the switch is pressed. Air flows to the upper body. Air flows to the upper body and feet. Air flows to the feet. Air flows to the feet and the front windshield defogger operates. ■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes Press . The mode switches between (recycles air inside the vehicle), AUTO and (introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the switch is pressed. When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system operates automatically. 186 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Defogging the front windshield Defogging The air conditioning system control operates automatically. Recirculated air mode will automatically switch to outside air mode. It is not possible to return to recirculated air mode when the switch is on. Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode 3 Press onds. STEP 2 Press (increase) or (decrease) on the for 2 or more secInterior features STEP 1 switch. From —3 (low) to 3 (high) can be set. 187 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets Center outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down Front outlets (right and left side) Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down Turn the knob right to open the vent and left to close the vent Rear outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down Turn the knob up to open the vent and down to close the vent 188 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ■ Using the automatic mode Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur. ● The system may switch automatically to recirculated mode when the coolest temperature setting is selected in summer. ● Immediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow. ● Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on. ■ Using the system in recirculated air mode The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an extended period. ■ Window defogger feature (outside air) mode in sitInterior features Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to uations where the windows need to be defogged. ■ Outside air temperature approaches 32F (0C). The air conditioning system may not operate even when ■ When the indicator light on 3 is pressed. flashes and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once Press more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ Automatic mode for air intake control In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes. CAUTION ■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision. 189 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger NOTICE ■ To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the automatic air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped. 190 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors. Without navigation system ON/OFF The defoggers will automatically turn off after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation time changes according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed. 3 With navigation system Interior features ON/OFF The defoggers will automatically turn off after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation time changes according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed. CAUTION ■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirror, as it can become very hot and burn you. 191 3-2. Using the audio system Audio system type With navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. Without navigation system CD player with changer and AM/FM radio Title Page Using the radio P. 194 Using the CD player P. 201 Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P. 207 Optimal use of the audio system P. 215 Using the AUX adapter P. 218 Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 219 ■ Using cellular phones Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating. 192 3-2. Using the audio system CAUTION ■ For vehicles sold in USA and Canada ● Part 15 of the FCC Rules FCC Warning: Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s authority to operate this device. ● Laser products NOTICE ■ To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off. ■ To avoid damaging the audio system Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system. 193 3 Interior features • Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself. This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages. • This product utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. 3-2. Using the audio system Using the radio Scans for receivable stations Station selector Displays radio text messages Seeking any traffic program station AMSAT/FM mode buttons Adjusting the frequency (AM, FM mode) or channel (SAT mode) Power Volume Seeking the frequency Changing the program types Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) STEP 1 Search for desired stations by turning the on STEP 2 or pressing or . Press and hold the switch (from set to, and you hear a beep. to ) the station is to be Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) ■ Scanning the preset radio stations STEP 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each. STEP 2 194 When the desired station is reached, press the switch once again. 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Scanning all radio stations within range STEP 1 Press . All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each. STEP 2 When the desired station is reached, press the switch once again. RDS (Radio Data System) This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which broadcast this information. ■ Receiving RDS broadcasts STEP 1 Press or on during FM reception. 3 The type of program changes each time the button is pressed. Interior features ● ROCK ● EASY LIS (Easy listening) ● CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz) ● R & B (Rhythm and Blues) ● INFORM (Information) ● RELIGION ● MISC (Miscellaneous) ● ALERT (Emergency messages) If the system receives no RDS stations, NO PTY appears on the display. STEP 2 Press , or or on . The radio seeks or scans the station by the relevant program type. ■ Displaying radio station names Press . 195 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Displaying radio text messages Press twice. If MSG shows in the display, a text message will be displayed. If the text continues past the end of the display, hold until you hear a beep. is displayed. Press and XM® Satellite Radio (If equipped) ■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio STEP 1 Press and hold until SAT shows in the display. The display changes as follows each time the switch is pressed. AM SAT1 SAT2 SAT3 STEP 2 Turn to select the desired channel in the all categories or press or on to select the desired channel in the current category. ■ Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets Select the desired channel. Press the button the channel is to be set to (from to ), and you hear a beep. ■ Changing the channel category Press or on the switch. ■ Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels ● Scanning channels in the current category STEP 1 STEP 2 196 Press . When the desired channel is reached, press the switch again. 3-2. Using the audio system ● Scanning preset channels Press and hold until you hear a beep. STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press the switch again. ■ Displaying text information Press . STEP 1 The display will show up to 10 characters. The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed. ● CH NAME ● TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE) 3 ● NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE) Interior features ● CH NUMBER 197 3-2. Using the audio system ■ When the battery is disconnected Stations presets are erased. ■ Reception sensitivity ● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc. ● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window. ■ XM® Satellite Radio An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces. ● XM® subscriptions For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe: U.S.A. Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-877-515-3987. Canada Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677. ● Radio ID You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a prob- lem. Select “CH000” using , and the receiver's 8-character ID number will appear. ● Satellite tuner The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio. *: Terms and services provided by XM® Satellite Radio are subject to change without notice. 198 3-2. Using the audio system ■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action. ANTENNA The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM® antenna cable is attached securely. There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer. You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels. NO SIGNAL LOADING The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM® Satellite Radio. The XM® signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal. The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information. OFF AIR The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel. ----- There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action needed. 199 Interior features UPDATING 3 3-2. Using the audio system --- The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877438-9677 (Canada). ■ Certifications for the radio tuner This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following: ● Reorienting or relocate the receiving antenna. ● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver. ● Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 200 3-2. Using the audio system Using the CD player Playback CD eject CD insert Displays text message Search playback Random playback 3 Power Volume Selecting a CD Interior features Selecting a track Repeat play Loading CDs ■ Loading a CD STEP 1 Push . WAIT is shown on the display. STEP 2 Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green. The display changes from WAIT to LOAD. ■ Loading multiple CDs STEP 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. WAIT is shown on the display. STEP 2 Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green. The display changes from WAIT to LOAD. The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted. 201 3-2. Using the audio system STEP 3 Insert the next CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green again. Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs. To stop the operation, press . Ejecting CDs ■ Ejecting a CD To select the CD to be ejected, press or on . STEP 1 The number of the CD selected is shown on the display. Press and remove the CD. ■ Ejecting all the CDs Press and hold until you hear a beep, and then remove the CDs. STEP 2 Selecting, fast-forwarding, rewinding, and scanning tracks ■ Selecting a track Press to move up and to move down using desired track number is displayed. To fast forward or rewind, press and hold or on ■ Scanning a CD STEP 1 Press . The first ten seconds of each track will be played. STEP 2 202 Press the switch again when the desired track is reached. until the . 3-2. Using the audio system Selecting a CD ■ To select a CD to play To select the desired CD, press or on ■ To scan loaded CDs STEP 1 Press and hold . until you hear a beep. The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played. STEP 2 Press the switch again when the desired CD is reached. Repeat play 3 ■ To repeat a track Press (RPT). Interior features ■ To repeat all of the tracks on a CD Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep. Random playback ■ Current CD Press (RAND). Tracks are played in random order until random playback is canceled. ■ All CDs Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep. Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in a random order until the switch is pressed once more. Switching the display Press . Each time the switch is pressed, the display changes in the order of Track no./ Elapsed time CD title Track name. 203 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback Press (RAND), (RPT), or again. ■ When LOAD, ERROR or WAIT is shown on the display LOAD: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD. ERROR: This indicates is a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down. WAIT: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press . Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD still cannot be played back. ■ Discs that can be used Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration. CDs with copy-protect features may not be used. ■ CD player protection feature To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected. ■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri- ods CDs may be damaged and may not play properly. ■ Lens cleaners Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player. 204 3-2. Using the audio system NOTICE ■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Disc. Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function. ● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm) 3 ● Low-quality and deformed CDs recording area ● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off 205 Interior features ● CDs with a transparent or translucent 3-2. Using the audio system NOTICE ■ CD player precautions Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or the player itself. ● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot. ● Do not apply oil to the CD player. ● Store CDs away from direct sunlight. ● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player. ● Do not insert more than one CD at a time. 206 3-2. Using the audio system Playing back MP3 and WMA discs Playback CD eject CD insert Search playback Displays text message Random playback Selecting a folder Selecting a file 3 Power Volume Selecting a CD Interior features Selecting a file Repeat play Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs Refer to the section entitled “Using the CD player” for details. (P. 201) Selecting a folder ■ Selecting folders one at a time Press () or () to select the desired folder. ■ Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder Press and hold until you hear a beep. When the desired folder is reached, press the switch once again. ■ Returning to the first folder Press and hold () until you hear a beep. 207 3-2. Using the audio system Selecting and scanning files ■ Selecting 1 file at a time or press or on Turn the to select the desired file. ■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder Press . When the desired file is reached, press the switch once again. Repeat play ■ To repeat a file Press (RPT). Folder repeat ■ To repeat all of the files on a folder Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep. Random playback ■ To play files from a particular folder in random order Press (RAND). ■ To play all of the files on a disc in random order Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep. Switching the display Press . Each time the switch is pressed, the display changes in the order of Folder no./File no./Elapsed time Folder name File name Album title (MP3 only) Track title Artist name. 208 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback Press (RAND), (RPT), or again. ■ When LOAD, ERROR or WAIT is shown on the display. LOAD: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD. ERROR: This indicates is a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down. WAIT: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press . Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD still cannot be played back. NO MUSIC: This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD. 3 ■ Discs that can be used ■ CD player protection feature To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the CD player is being used. ■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri- ods CDs may be damaged and may not play properly. ■ Lens cleaners Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player. 209 Interior features Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration. 3-2. Using the audio system ■ MP3 and WMA files MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format. Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression. WMA (Windows Media TMAudio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format. There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats recorded by them that can be used. ● MP3 file compatibility • Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3) • Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps) * Compatible with VBR • Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural ● WMA file compatibility • Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 • Compatible sampling frequencies 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps) Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps) *Only compatible with 2-channel playback ● Compatible media Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs. Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints. 210 3-2. Using the audio system ● Compatible disc formats The following disc formats can be used. 211 3 Interior features • Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2 CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2 • File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet) MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows. • Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels • Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters • Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root) • Maximum number of files per disc: 255 ● File names The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma. ● Multi-sessions As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played. ● ID3 and WMA tags ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name, etc. The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags. 3-2. Using the audio system ● MP3 and WMA playback When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders. Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot be played. ● Extensions If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers. ● Playback • To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. • CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc. • There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries. 212 3-2. Using the audio system NOTICE ■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Disc. Doing so may damage the CD player and render the CD insert/eject function unusable. ● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm) 3 ● Low-quality and deformed CDs Interior features ● CDs with a transparent or translucent recording area ● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off 213 3-2. Using the audio system NOTICE ■ CD player precautions Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the CDs or the player itself. ● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot. ● Do not apply oil to the CD player. ● Store CDs away from direct sunlight. ● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player. ● Do not insert more than one CD at a time. 214 3-2. Using the audio system Optimal use of the audio system Displays the current mode. Changes the following setting. • Listening position (P. 216) The sound feel setting can be changed to produce the best sound for each listening position. • Sound quality and volume balance (P. 216) The sound quality and balance setting can be changed to produce the best sound. 3 Interior features • Automatic Sound Levelizer ON/OFF (P. 217) Using the AUDIO CONTROL function ■ Changing modes Pressing selects the mode to be change in the following order. POSBASMIDTREFADBALASL 215 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Changing the listening position Turning changes the position in the following order. Display Listening position DRIVER Position best suited to the driver’s seat FRONT Position best suited to the driver’s and front passenger seats REAR ALL Position best suited to the rear seats Position best suited to all seats ■ Adjusting sound quality Turning adjusts the level. Sound quality mode Mode displayed Level Turn to the left Turn to the right Bass* BAS -5 to 5 Mid-range* MID -5 to 5 Low High Treble* TRE -5 to 5 Front/rear volume balance FAD F7 to R7 Shifts to rear Shifts to front Left/right volume balance BAL L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right *: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio mode or CD mode. 216 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) Turning to the right turns ON the ASL, and turning to the left turns OFF the ASL. ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise level as you drive your vehicle. 3 Interior features 217 3-2. Using the audio system Using the AUX adapter This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle’s speakers. Connect the portable audio device. STEP 1 STEP 2 Press . ■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself. ■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio device. 218 3-2. Using the audio system Using the steering wheel audio switches Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel. Power on, select audio source Volume Radio: Select radio stations CD: Select tracks, files (MP3 and WMA) and discs 3 Turning on the power when the audio system is turned OFF. The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down for a few second. Changing the audio source Press when the audio system is turned ON. The audio source changes as follows each time the switch is pressed. FM1FM2CD changerAUXAMSAT1SAT2SAT3 Adjusting the volume Press + on to increase the volume and - to decrease the volume. Hold down the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume. 219 Interior features Press 3-2. Using the audio system Selecting a radio station STEP 1 Press to select the radio mode. STEP 2 Press or on the switch to select a radio station. To seek for receivable stations, press and hold the switch until you hear a beep. Selecting a track/file STEP 1 Press to select the CD mode. STEP 2 Press or on the switch to select the desired track/file. Selecting a disc in the CD player STEP 1 Press to select the CD mode. STEP 2 Press and hold or on switch until a beep is heard. CAUTION ■ To reduce the risk of an accident Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel. 220 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Hands-free phone system features (for cellular phone) (if equipped) This system supports Bluetooth®, which allows you to make or receive calls without using cables to connect a cellular phone and the system, and without operating the cellular phone. Title Page Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) P. 224 Making a phone call P. 232 Setting a cellular phone P. 236 Security and system setup P. 240 Using the phone book P. 243 3 The hands-free phone system may not operate normally in the following situations: ● The cellular phone is turned off, or located outside the service area. ● The cellular phone has a low battery. ● The cellular phone is not connected to the system. ● The cellular phone is behind the seat or in the glove box, or metal material cov- ers or touches the phone. ■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle Be sure to initialize the system to prevent the personal data from being improperly accessed. ■ Required profiles for the cellular phone ● HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 ● OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 ■ Trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG. Inc. 221 Interior features ■ Conditions affecting operation 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) ■ Certification for the hands-free phone system FCC ID: HYQBTAU01A IC ID: 1551A-BTAU01A MADE IN JAPAN NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 222 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth, for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 20 cm and more between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and legs). Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 3 Interior features CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not use a cellular phone, or connect the Bluetooth® phone. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to a cellular phone Do not leave a cellular phone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may become high resulting in damage to the phone. 223 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) ■ Audio unit Displays such items as message, name, and phone number Lower-case characters and special characters, such as an umlaut, cannot be displayed. Push and hold: Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the screen Selects speed dials Selects items such as menu or number Turn: Selects an item Press: Inputs the selected item Displays the reception level Displays Bluetooth® connection condition If BT is not displayed, the hands-free phone system cannot be used. 224 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) ■ Steering wheel Volume The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted by using this button. ■ Microphone 225 3 Interior features Hands-free phone system ON/starts a call Hands-free phone system OFF/ends a call/refuses a call Press: Voice command system ON Press and hold: Voice command system OFF 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Operating the system by using a voice command By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice commands can be given to allow for operation of the hands-free phone system without checking the display or operating . ■ Operation procedure when using a voice command Press and say a command for a desired function. (P. 228) ■ Auxiliary commands when using a voice command The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the system using a voice command: Cancel: Exits the hands-free phone system Repeat: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction Go back: Returns to the previous procedure Help: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function 226 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Using the hands-free phone system for the first time Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register a cellular phone in the system. The phone registration mode will be entered automatically when starting the system with no cellular phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register a cellular phone: Press or . The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions are heard. STEP 1 STEP 2 Register a phone name by either of the following methods. a. Select “Record Name” by using , and say a name to be Interior features registered. b. Press and say a name to be registered. Voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard. STEP 3 Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or . A passkey is displayed and heard, and voice guidance instruction for inputting the passkey into the cellular phone is heard. STEP 4 3 Input the passkey into the cellular phone. Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone. Guidance for registration completion is heard. 227 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Menu list of the hands-free phone system ■ Normal operation First menu Second menu Third menu Operation detail Callback - - Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory Redial - - Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory Dial by number - - Dialing by inputting a number Dial by name - - Dialing by inputting a name registered in the phone book Add Entry - Adding a new number Change Name - Changing a name in the phone book Delete Entry - Deleting the phone book data Delete Phonebook Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial) - Deleting a registered speed dial List Names - List the phone book data Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial) - Registering speed dial 228 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) First menu Second menu Security Setup System Setup Operation detail Set PIN Setting a PIN code Phonebook Lock Locking the phone book Phonebook Unlock Unlocking the phone book Pair Phone Registering a cellular phone to be used Change Name Changing a registered name of a cellular phone Delete Deleting a registered cellular phone List phones Listing the registered cellular phones Select phone Selecting a cellular phone to be used Set Passkey Changing the passkey Guidance Volume Setting voice guidance volume (Guidance Vol) Initialize Initialization 229 3 Interior features Phone Setup Third menu 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) ■ Using a short cut key First menu Second menu Operation detail Dial “XXX (name)” - Dialing a number registered in the phone book Phone book add entry - Adding a new number Phone book change name - Changing a name of a phone number in the phone book Phone book delete entry - Deleting phone book data Phone book set speed dial - Registering speed dial Phone book delete speed dial - Deleting speed dial Phonebook 230 Phonebook Unlock Unlocking the phone book Phonebook Lock Locking the phone book 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) ■ Automatic adjustment of volume When vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less. ■ When using a voice command ● For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound), (star), and + (plus). ● Say a command correctly and clearly. ■ The system may not recognize your voice in the following situations: ● When driving on a rough road ● When driving at high speeds 3 ● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone Interior features ● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise ■ The following cannot be performed while driving: ● Operating the system with ● Registering a cellular phone to the system ■ Changing the passkey P. 239 231 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Making a phone call ■ Making a phone call ● Dialing by inputting a number 1. “Dial by number” ● Dialing by inputting a name 1. “Dial by name” ● Speed dialing ● Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory 1. “Redial” ● Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory 1. “Call back” ■ Receiving a phone call ● Answering the phone ● Refusing the call ■ Transferring a call ■ Using a call history memory ● Dialing ● Storing data in the phone book ● Deleting Dialing by inputting a number STEP 1 Press and say “Dial by number”. STEP 2 Press and say the phone number. 232 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) STEP 3 Dial by one of the following methods: a. Press . b. Press and say “Dial”. c. Select “Dial” by using . Dialing by inputting a name STEP 1 Press and say “Dial by name”. STEP 2 Select a registered name to be input by either of the following methods: STEP 3 and say a registered name. b. Press and say “List names”. Press desired name is being read aloud. Dial by one of the following methods: a. Press . b. Press and say “Dial”. c. Select “Dial” by using while the . Speed dialing STEP 1 Press . STEP 2 Press the preset button in which the desired number is registered. STEP 3 Press . 233 Interior features a. Press 3 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) When receiving a phone call ■ Answering the phone Press . ■ Refusing the call Press . Transferring a call A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods: a. Operate the cellular phone. Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone. b. Press *1. c. Press and say “Call Transfer” *2. *1 : This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from the cellular phone to the system during a call. *2 : While the vehicle is in motion, a call cannot be transferred from the system to the cellular phone. Using a call history memory Follow the procedure below to use number stored in call history memory: STEP 1 234 Press and say “Redial” (when using a number stored in the outgoing history memory) or “Call back” (when using a number stored in the incoming history memory). 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) STEP 2 Select the number by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is displayed. b. Select the desired number by using . The following operations can be performed: Dialing: Press or select “Dial” by using a voice command or . Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” by using a voice command or . Interior features Deleting: Select “Delete” by using a voice command or 3 . ■ Call history Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming history memories. ■ When talking on the phone ● Do not talk simultaneously with the other party. ● Keep the volume of the receiving voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will increase. 235 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Setting a cellular phone Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free phone system allows the system to function. The following function can be used for registered cellular phones: ■ Functions and operation procedures To enter menu for each function, follow the steps below by using a voice command or : ● Registering a cellular phone 1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Pair Phone” ● Selecting a cellular phone to be used 1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Select Phone” ● Changing a registered name 1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Change Name” ● Listing the registered cellular phones 1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “List Phones” ● Deleting a cellular phone 1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Delete” ● Changing the passkey 1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Set Passkey” Registering a cellular phone Select “Pair Phone” by using a voice command or cedure for registering a cellular phone. (P. 227) 236 , and do the pro- 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Selecting a cellular phone to be used STEP 1 Select “Select Phone” by using a voice command or . Pattern A STEP 2 Select a cellular phone to be used by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or a. Press b. Press and say the desired phone name. and say “List phones”. While the name of the Select a cellular phone to be used by using 3 . Interior features desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press Pattern B STEP 2 : . Changing a registered name STEP 1 Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or STEP 2 Select a name of cellular phone to be changed by either of the following methods: a. Press and say the desired phone name, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or b. Press . . and say “List phones”. While the desired phone name is being read aloud, press . c. Select the desired phone name by using . 237 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) STEP 3 Press or select “Record Name” by using , and say a new name. STEP 4 Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or . Listing the registered cellular phones Selecting “List Phones” by using a voice command or begins read- ing aloud the list of the registered cellular phones. When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”. Pressing while a name of cellular phone is being read selects the cellular phone, and the following functions will be available: • Selecting a cellular phone: “Select Phone” • Changing a registered name: “Change Name” • Deleting a cellular phone: “Delete” Deleting a cellular phone STEP 1 Select “Delete” by using a voice command or . Pattern A STEP 2 Select a cellular phone to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or : a. Press b. Press and say the name of the desired cellular phone. and say “List phones”. While the name of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press 238 . 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Pattern B STEP 2 Select a desired cellular phone to be deleted by using . Changing the passkey STEP 1 Select “Set Passkey” by using a voice command or . Pattern A STEP 2 Press , say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or . 3 Pattern B Select a 4 to 8-digit number by using . The number should be input 1 digit at a time. STEP 3 When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, press once again. ■ The number of cellular phone that can be registered Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system. 239 Interior features STEP 2 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Security and system setup To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below: ■ Security setting items and operation procedure ● Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number) 1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Set PIN” ● Locking the phone book 1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Phonebook Lock” ● Unlocking the phone book 1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Phonebook Unlock” ■ System setup items and operation procedure ● Setting voice guidance volume 1. “Setup” 2. “System Setup” 3. “Guidance Vol” ● Initialization 1. “Setup” 2. “System Setup” 3. “Initialize” can only be used for system setup operation. Setting or changing the PIN ■ Setting a PIN STEP 1 Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or STEP 2 Enter a PIN by using a voice command or When using . . , input the code 1 digit at a time. ■ Changing the PIN STEP 1 240 Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or . 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) STEP 2 Enter the registered PIN by using a voice command or STEP 3 Enter a new PIN by using a voice command or When using . . , input the code 1 digit at a time. Locking or unlocking the phone book STEP 1 Select “Phonebook lock (Phbk Lock)” or “Phonebook unlock (Phbk Unlock)” by using a voice command or STEP 2 . Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select “Con- a. Press : Interior features firm” by using a voice command or and say the registered PIN. b. Input a new PIN by using . Setting voice guidance volume STEP 1 Select “Guidance Vol” by using STEP 2 Change the voice guidance volume. To decrease the volume: Turn To increase the volume: Turn 3 . counterclockwise. clockwise. 241 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Initialization STEP 1 Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” by using STEP 2 Select “Confirm” by using . again. ■ Initialization ● The following data in the system can be initialized: • Phone book • Outgoing and incoming history • Speed dial • Registered cellular phone data • Security code ● Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored to its original state. ■ When the phone book is locked The following functions cannot be used: ● Dialing by inputting a name ● Speed dialing ● Dialing a number stored in the call history memory ● Using the phone book 242 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Using the phone book To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below: ● Adding a new phone number 1. “Phonebook” 2. “Add Entry” ● Setting speed dial 1. “Phonebook” 2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” ● Changing a registered name 1. “Phonebook” 2. “Change Name” ● Deleting registered data 1. “Phonebook” 2. “Delete Entry” ● Deleting speed dial 1. “Phonebook” 2. “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” 3 Interior features ● Listing the registered data 1. “Phonebook” 2. “List Names” Adding a new phone number The following methods can be used to add a new phone number: ● Inputting a phone number by using a voice command ● Transferring data from the cellular phone ● Inputting a phone number by using ● Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming history ■ Adding procedure STEP 1 Select “Add Entry” by using a voice command or . 243 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number: Inputting a telephone number by using a voice command STEP 2 STEP2-1 Select “By Voice” by using a voice command or . STEP2-2 Press , say the desired number, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command. Transferring data from the cellular phone STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” by using a voice command or . STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the cellular phone. Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the details of transferring data. STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command. b. Select the desired data by using . Inputting a phone number by using STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” by using STEP2-2 Input a phone number by using once again. Input the phone number 1 digit at a time. 244 . , and press 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming history STEP2-1 Select “Call History” by using a voice command or . STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” by using a voice command or . STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command. STEP 3 . Select the name to be registered by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or a. Press : and say the desired name. b. Select “Record Name” by using , and say the desired name. STEP 4 Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or again. In STEP 3 , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of “Confirm” registers the newly added phone number as speed dial. 245 Interior features b. Select the desired data by using 3 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Setting speed dial STEP 1 Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” by using a voice command or STEP 2 . Select the data to be registered as speed dial by either of the following methods: a. Press , say desired number, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or b. Press . , and say “List names”. While the desired name is being read aloud, press voice command or , and select “Confirm” by using a . c. Select the desired data by using STEP 3 . Select the desired preset button, and register the data into speed dial by either of the following methods: a. Press the desired preset button, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or . b. Press and hold the desired preset button. 246 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Changing a registered name STEP 1 Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or STEP 2 Select a name to be changed by either of the following methods. a. Press , say desired name, and select “Confirm” by using . a voice command or b. Press . , and say “List names”. During the desired name is read aloud, press command or , and select “Confirm” by using a voice . 3 . STEP 3 Select “Record Name” with STEP 4 Say a new name, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or or the talk switch. . Deleting registered data STEP 1 Select “Delete Entry” by using a voice command or . Pattern A STEP 2 Select data to be deleted by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or : a. Press , and say the name of the desired phone number to be deleted. 247 Interior features c. Select the desired name by using 3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) b. Press , say “List phones”. While the name of the desired phone number is being read aloud, press . Pattern B STEP 2 Select data to be deleted by using . Deleting speed dial STEP 1 Select “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” by using a voice command or STEP 2 . Press the preset button in which the desired speed dial is registered, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or . Listing the registered data Selecting “List names” by using a voice command begins reading the list of the registered data. When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phonebook”. Pressing while a data is being read aloud selects the data, and the following function will be available. • • • • Dialing: “Dial” Changing a registered name: “Change Name” Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry” Setting speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” ■ Limitation of number of digits A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered. 248 3-4. Using the interior lights Interior lights list Your Lexus is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist in entering the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights shown in the following illustration automatically turn on/off according to the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the doors are opened/closed, and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode. 3 Interior features Front personal lights (P. 251) Front interior lights (P. 251) Rear personal lights ( P. 251) Rear interior lights Door courtesy lighting Shift lever lighting This light turns on or off depending on the darkness of the surroundings when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. Front foot well lighting Outer foot lights 249 3-4. Using the interior lights ■ To prevent the battery from being discharged If the following lights remain ON when the door is not fully closed and the DOOR switch is ON, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes. ● Interior lights ● Front personal lights ● Front foot well lighting ● Rear door courtesy lighting ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 435) 250 3-4. Using the interior lights Front interior lights and personal lights Front interior lights Door position OFF/ON The illuminated entry system is activated when the switch is not in the locked position (the door position is on). ON/OFF Personal lights 3 Front Rear 251 Interior features ON/OFF As for front personal lights, the illuminated entry system is activated even if the switch is in the off position when the DOOR switch of the interior light is on. 3-5. Using the storage features List of storage features Glove box Glove box Overhead console Cup holders Console box Auxiliary box Glove box Open (push button) Lock with the mechanical key Unlock with the mechanical key 252 3-5. Using the storage features Glove box and console box ■ Glove box light The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are turned on. ■ Trunk opener main switch The trunk opener main switch located in the glove box. ( P. 41) CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Keep the glove box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. 3 Console box Interior features To open, press the button. To close, pull up the lever. 253 3-5. Using the storage features Console box ■ Tray in the console box The tray slides forward/backward and can be removed. ■ Console box light The console box light turns on when the tail lights are turned on. CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Keep the console box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. 254 3-5. Using the storage features Overhead console Overhead console The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and similar small items. CAUTION 3 ■ Items that should not be left in the overhead console ■ Caution while driving Do not leave the overhead console open while driving. Items may fall out and cause injury. 255 Interior features Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console. If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses may warp or become cracked. 3-5. Using the storage features Cup holders Cup holders Front To open, press down and release the front of the cup holder lid. Rear 256 3-5. Using the storage features Cup holders ■ Using the cup holder (front) to store small items Remove the holder. ■ The cup holder (front) can be adjustable to the size of the cups or drink-cans Change the holder position. 3 Interior features CAUTION ■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns. ■ When not in use Keep the cup holders closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. 257 3-5. Using the storage features Auxiliary box Auxiliary box To open, press down the knob. CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Keep the auxiliary box closed. In the event of sudden braking, personal injury may result from contact due to movement of the open auxiliary box or items that may come out of the auxiliary box. 258 3-6. Other interior features Sun visors Forward position: Flip down. Side position: Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side. Side extender: Place in side position, then slide backwards. 3 Interior features 259 3-6. Other interior features Vanity mirror The light turns on when the cover is opened. 260 3-6. Other interior features Clock Without navigation system Adjusts the hour. Adjusts the minutes. Rounds to the nearest hour.* *: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 1:00 1:30 to 1:59 2:00 With navigation system 3 Interior features ■ The clock is displayed when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. 261 3-6. Other interior features Ashtray Push the back part of the lid to open. To remove, pull the ashtray upwards. CAUTION ■ When not in use Keep the ashtray closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. ■ To prevent fire ● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then make sure the ashtray is fully closed. ● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray. 262 3-6. Other interior features Cigarette lighter Push the back part of the lid to open, and push the cigarette lighter down. The cigarette lighter will pop up when it is ready for use. ■ The cigarette lighter can be used when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. 3 Interior features CAUTION ■ To avoid burns or fires ● Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter. ● Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire. ● Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet. 263 3-6. Other interior features Power outlet The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less than 10 A. ■ The power outlet can be used when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. NOTICE ■ To avoid damaging the power outlet Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit. ■ To prevent the fuse from being blown Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A. ■ To prevent the battery from being discharged Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 264 3-6. Other interior features Seat heaters and ventilators (if equipped) The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflow by blowing air from the seats. Heats the seats Left front seat Right front seat The indicator light (orange) comes on. The higher the number, the warmer the seats become. Blows air from the seats The indicator light (green) comes on. The higher the number, the stronger the airflow becomes. 3 Interior features ■ The seat heaters and ventilators can be used when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ When not in use Set the dial to 0. The indicator light turns off. CAUTION ■ Burns ● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns: • • • • Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled Persons with sensitive skin Persons who are fatigued Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.) ● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater. Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating. 265 3-6. Other interior features NOTICE ■ To prevent seat heater damage Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat. ■ To prevent battery discharge Set the dial to 0 when the engine is not running. 266 3-6. Other interior features Armrest Pull the armrest down for use. NOTICE 3 ■ To prevent damage to the armrest Do not place too much strain on the armrest. Interior features 267 3-6. Other interior features Rear sunshade (if equipped) The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating the switch shown below. Type A Raise/lower Type B ■ The rear sunshade can be used when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Reverse operation feature The rear sunshade automatically lowers when the shift lever is shifted into R. The rear sunshade rises when the shift lever is shifted out of R and vehicle speed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h). ■ When the reverse operation feature does not operate The rear sunshade may not lower or rise automatically. In this case, press the switch to lower or raise the rear sunshade. 268 3-6. Other interior features CAUTION ■ When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the opening. They may get caught, causing injury. NOTICE ■ To prevent the battery from being discharged Do not operate the rear sunshade when the engine is not running. ■ To ensure normal operation of the sunshade Observe the following precautions. 3 ● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components. Interior features ● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations. ● Do not attach items to the rear sunshade. ● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions. ● Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously over long periods of time. 269 3-6. Other interior features Extended trunk Long objects can be loaded in the vehicle by utilizing the trunk space and rear seat area. STEP 1 Pull down the armrest. STEP 2 Open the armrest door. The armrest door can be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key. Lock Unlock CAUTION ■ When not in use Ensure that the armrest door is closed. In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown forward into the cabin, resulting in injury. 270 3-6. Other interior features Floor mat Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet. Secure the driver’s floor mat using the hooks provided. 3 CAUTION Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and interfering with the movement of the pedals during driving, resulting in an accident. ● Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and the correct side faces upward. ● Do not place floor mats on top of existing mats. 271 Interior features ■ When inserting the floor mat 3-6. Other interior features Trunk features ■ Cargo hooks Cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items. ■ Grocery bag hooks ■ Luggage mat Pull the lever upwards when lifting the luggage mat up. 272 3-6. Other interior features The lever can be hooked on the edge of the trunk. CAUTION 3 ■ When the cargo hooks are not in use NOTICE ■ When closing the trunk Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk. The luggage mat may get damaged. 273 Interior features To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in use. 3-6. Other interior features Garage door opener The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems, and other devices. The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink. Programming the HomeLink (for USA owners) The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device. Buttons Indicator ■ Programming the HomeLink STEP 1 Point the remote control for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink control buttons. Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while programming. 274 3-6. Other interior features STEP 2 Press and hold down one of the buttons on the HomeLink and the button on the transmitter. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons. STEP 3 Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. STEP 4 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink buttons. 275 3 Interior features If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If the garage door does not operate, see if your garage transmitter is of the Rolling Code type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink) flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then remains lit. If your transmitter is the Rolling Code type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”. 3-6. Other interior features ■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for USA owners) If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the heading “Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with the steps listed below. STEP 1 Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener for the location of the training button. STEP 2 STEP 3 Press the training button. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button twice. The garage door may open. If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door. The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink transceiver and operate the garage door. Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons. ■ Programming an entry gate (for USA owners)/Programming all devices in the Canadian market STEP 1 Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink. STEP 4 Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while programming. STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 276 Press and hold the selected HomeLink button. Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control button for two seconds each until step 4 is complete. When the indicator light on the HomeLink compatible transceiver start to flashing rapidly, release the buttons. 3-6. Other interior features Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly. STEP 6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink buttons. ■ Programming other devices To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance. STEP 5 ■ Reprogramming a button The individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Basic programming” instructions. Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicator light on the HomeLink transceiver should turn on. The HomeLink continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed. Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs) Press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator light flashes. If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink memory. 277 Interior features Operating the HomeLink 3 3-6. Other interior features ■ Before programming ● Install a new battery in the transmitter. ● The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink. ■ Certification for the garage door opener This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device. CAUTION ■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device The garage door may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm. ■ Conforming to federal safety standards Do not use the HomeLink Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury. 278 3-6. Other interior features Compass The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading. ■ Operation To turn the compass on or off, push and hold AUTO for 3 seconds. 3 ■ Displays and directions Direction N North NE Northeast E East SE Southeast S South SW Southwest W West NW Northwest Interior features Display 279 3-6. Other interior features Calibrating the compass The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle. If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate. To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following. ■ Deviation calibration STEP 1 Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle. Push and hold AUTO for 6 secSTEP 2 onds. A number (1 to 15) appears on the compass display. 280 3-6. Other interior features STEP 3 Press AUTO, and referring to the map above, select the number of the zone where you are. If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete. ■ Circling calibration STEP 1 Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle. Push and hold AUTO for 9 secSTEP 2 onds. C appears on the compass display. 3 Drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/ h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed. 281 Interior features STEP 3 3-6. Other interior features ■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions: ● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning. ● The vehicle is on an inclined surface. ● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interfer- ence by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.). ● The vehicle has become magnetized. (There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.) ● The battery has been disconnected. ● A door is open. CAUTION ■ While driving the vehicle Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped. ■ When doing the circling calibration Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration. NOTICE ■ To avoid compass malfunctions Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror. Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor. ■ To ensure normal operation of the compass ● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields. ● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration. 282 Maintenance and care 4 4-1. Maintenance and care ............................... 284 Headlight aim (vehicles with discharge headlights) ........ 344 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior............ 284 Light bulbs................................ 345 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior.............. 287 4-2. Maintenance .................. 290 Maintenance requirements ........................ 290 General maintenance .......... 292 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs................................ 295 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ................ 296 Do-it-yourself service precautions ........................... 296 Hood ......................................... 300 Positioning a floor jack .......... 301 Engine compartment........... 303 Tires............................................. 318 Tire inflation pressure ........... 326 Wheels ..................................... 330 Air conditioning filter........... 332 Electronic key battery.......... 334 Checking and replacing fuses......................................... 336 283 4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition. ● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust. Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois. ● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water. ● Wipe away any water. ● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates. If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool. ■ Automatic car washes ● Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle. ● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint. ■ High pressure car washes ● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows. ● Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed prop- erly. ■ Touch-up paint (if equipped) Touch-up paint may be used to cover small chips or scratches. Apply the paint soon after the damage occurs or corrosion may set in. To apply the touch-up paint so it is hardly noticeable the trick is to apply it only to the bare spots. Apply only the smallest amount possible and do not paint the surface around the scratch or chip. 284 4-1. Maintenance and care ■ Aluminum wheels Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint. ■ Bumpers and side moldings Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. ■ To prevent deterioration and do by corrosion ● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases: • • • • • After driving near the sea coast After driving on salted roads If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances • If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud • If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface ● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately. ■ Caution about the exhaust pipe Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns. 285 Maintenance and care CAUTION 4 4-1. Maintenance and care NOTICE ■ To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline. ■ Cleaning the exterior lights ● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights. ● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses. ■ When using an automatic car wash (vehicles equipped with the rain-sensing windshield wipers) OFF 286 Set the wiper switch to OFF. If the wiper switch is in AUTO, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged. 4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition: ■ Protecting the vehicle interior Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water. ■ Cleaning the leather areas ● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. ● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent. Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent. ● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent. ● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in shaded and ventilated area. ● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth. ● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth. 287 Maintenance and care ■ Synthetic leather areas ● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner. 4 4-1. Maintenance and care ■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna. ■ Caring for leather areas Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior. ■ Shampooing the carpets There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. The excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. ■ Seat belts Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts. CAUTION ■ Water in the vehicle ● Be careful not to splash or spill liquid on the floor. ● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (P. 77) Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or severe injury. 288 4-1. Maintenance and care NOTICE ■ Cleaning detergents Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces. ● Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, or bleach. ● Seats: Acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol. ■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces. ● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately. ● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer. ● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly. ■ Water on the floor ■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna. 289 Maintenance and care Do not wash the vehicle floor with water. Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also cause the body to rust. 4 4-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance. ■ General maintenance Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer. ■ Scheduled maintenance Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule. For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”. ■ Do-it-yourself maintenance You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself. Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage. The use of Lexus Repair Manuals is recommended. For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Guide”, “Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”. ■ Repair and replacement It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage. 290 4-2. Maintenance ■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer ● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle. ● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. CAUTION ■ Warning in handling of battery ● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com- ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area. ● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo- nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately. pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 314) 291 Maintenance and care ● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com- 4 4-2. Maintenance General maintenance Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “Owners Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for advice. Engine compartment Items 292 Check points Battery Maintenance-free. (P. 314) Brake fluid At the correct level? (P. 311) Engine coolant At the correct level? (P. 309) Engine oil At the correct level? (P. 305) Exhaust system No fumes or strange sounds? Power steering fluid At the correct level? (P. 312) Radiator/condenser/hoses Not blocked with foreign matter? (P. 311) Washer fluid At the correct level? (P. 317) 4-2. Maintenance Vehicle interior Items Check points Accelerator pedal • Moves smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching)? Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism • Can the vehicle be hold securely on an incline with the shift lever in P? Brake pedal • Moves smoothly? • Does it have appropriate clearance and correct amount of free play? Brakes • Not pull to one side when applied? • Loss of brake effectiveness? • Spongy feeling brake pedal? • Pedal almost touches floor? • Move smoothly and lock securely? Indicators/buzzers • Function properly? Lights • Do all the lights come on? • Headlights aimed correctly? (P. 344) Parking brake • Moves smoothly? • Can hold the vehicle securely on an incline? Seat belts • Does the seat belt system operate smoothly? • Are the belts undamaged? Seats • Do the seat controls operate properly? Maintenance and care Head restraints 4 293 4-2. Maintenance Items Steering wheel Check points • Moves smoothly? • Has correct free play? • No strange noises? Vehicle exterior Items Check points Door/trunk • Operate smoothly? Engine hood • The lock system works properly? Fluid leaks • Is there any leakage after parking? Tire • Inflation pressure is correct? • Tire surfaces not worn or damaged? • Tires rotated according to the maintenance schedule? • Wheel nuts are not loose? CAUTION ■ If the engine is running Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks. 294 4-2. Maintenance Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system. ■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle. ■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test: ● When the battery is disconnected or discharged Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set. ● When the fuel tank cap is loose 4 ■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times. ■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing. 295 Maintenance and care The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in these sections. Items Battery condition Brake fluid level Engine coolant level 296 Parts and tools (P. 314) • Warm water • Baking soda • Grease • Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts) (P. 311) • FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid • Rag or paper towel • Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid) (P. 309) • “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. For the USA: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. For Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. • Funnel (used only for adding engine coolant) 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Items Parts and tools Engine oil level (P. 305) • “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent • Rag or paper towel, funnel (used only for adding engine oil) Fuses (P. 336) • Fuse with same amperage rating as original Tire inflation pressure (P. 326) • Tire pressure gauge • Compressed air source Headlight aim (P. 344) • Phillips-head screwdriver Power steering fluid level Washer fluid (P. 311) (P. 317) • Water washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use) • Funnel 297 4 Maintenance and care Radiator and condenser (P. 312) • Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II or III • Rag or paper towel • Funnel (used only for adding power steering fluid) 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury. ■ When working on the engine compartment: ● Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt. ● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driv- ing as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot. ● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment. ● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable. ● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid. ● Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor. ■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille: Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is OFF. With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 311) ■ Safety glasses Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in the eyes. 298 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE ■ If you remove the air cleaner: Driving with the air filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment. ■ If the fluid level is low or high It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem. 4 Maintenance and care 299 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Hood Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood. STEP 1 Pull the hood release lever. The hood will pop up slightly. STEP 2 Lift the hood catch and lift the hood. CAUTION ■ Pre-driving check Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury. 300 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Positioning a floor jack When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury. ■ Front ■ Rear 4 Maintenance and care 301 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ When raising your vehicle: Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury. ● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as the one shown in the illustration. ● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle. ● Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by the floor jack. Always use automotive jack stands on a solid, level surface. ● Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack. ● Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shift lever in P. ● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point. Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle. ● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the floor jack. 302 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Engine compartment 4 Fuse box (P. 336) Electric cooling fans Condenser (P. 311) Radiator (P. 311) Washer fluid tank (P. 317) Engine coolant reservoir (P. 309) Maintenance and care Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 312) Engine oil filler cap (P. 306) Engine oil level dipstick (P. 305) Brake fluid reservoir (P. 311) Battery (P. 314) 303 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Engine compartment cover ■ Removing the engine compartment cover Front Right-hand side • When installing the cover, make sure that the engine coolant reservoir hose positioned as shown in the illustration. Left-hand side 304 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Installing the clips Press the tip of the clip against a hard surface, such as a desk, to allow the center part of the clip to be pushed up. Insert Press Engine oil With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick. STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Wipe the dipstick clean. Reinsert the dipstick fully. Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level. 305 4 Maintenance and care ■ Checking the engine oil STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine. Hold a rag under the end and pull STEP 2 the dipstick out. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully. Low Full ■ Adding engine oil If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine. Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil. Oil grade Items STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 ILSAC multi-grade engine oil Clean funnel Remove the oil filler cap. Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick. Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise. It takes about 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.) to raise the oil level from low to full on the dipstick. 306 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Recommended viscosity SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel economy, and good starting in cold weather. Outside temperature If SAE 5W-30 oil is not available, SAE 10W-30 oil may be used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil change. ■ How to read oil container labels Some oil containers are labeled with ILSAC certification marks that help you to select the proper oil. 4 Maintenance and care 307 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Engine oil consumption ● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven. ● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and fre- quent acceleration and deceleration. ● A new engine consumes more oil. ● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately. ● Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp.qt./600 miles (1.0 L per 1000 km) ● If you consume more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 lmp.qt.) every 600 miles (1000 km), contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Changing the engine oil (USA only) To reset the oil change system, follow the procedure below: 1. Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF with the trip meter A reading shown. (P. 124) 2. While pressing the trip meter reset button, set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the IGNITION ON mode. Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays 000000. CAUTION ■ Used engine oil ● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. ● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis- pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal. ● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children. 308 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE ■ To prevent serious engine damage: Check the oil level on regular basis. ■ When replacing the engine oil ● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components. ● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged. ● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle. ● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly retightened. Engine coolant The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the F and L lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold. Full Low 4 ■ When adding the engine coolant When installing the reservoir cap, make sure that the engine coolant reservoir hose positioned as shown in the illustration. 309 Maintenance and care If the level is on or below the L line, add coolant up to the F line. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer pressure test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system. ■ Coolant selection Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. USA: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31F [-35C]) Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44F [-42C]) For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer. CAUTION ■ When the engine is hot Do not remove the radiator cap. The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries. NOTICE ■ When adding engine coolant Coolant is neither plain water not straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and anti freeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label. ■ If you spill coolant Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint. 310 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Radiator and condenser Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects. If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. CAUTION ■ When the engine is hot Do not touch the radiator or condenser, as they may be hot and you may be burned. Brake fluid ■ Checking fluid level The brake fluid level should be between the MAX and MIN lines on the tank. Maintenance and care Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items. ■ Adding fluid Fluid type Items 4 FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid Clean funnel ■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid. 311 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ When filling the reservoir Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor. NOTICE ■ If the fluid level is low or high It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem. Power steering fluid ■ Fluid level The fluid level should be within the appropriate range. Full (when cold) Add fluid (when cold) Full (when hot) Add fluid (when hot) Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20 minutes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures. (Fluid temperature, 140F - 175F [60C - 80C]) Cold: Engine has not been run for about 5 hours. (Room temperature, 50F - 85F [10C - 30C]) 312 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Checking the fluid level Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items. Fluid type Items STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II or III Rag or paper towel and funnel (only for adding fluid) Clean all dirt off the reservoir. Remove the reservoir cap by turning it counterclockwise and wipe the dipstick clean. Reinstall the reservoir cap. Remove the reservoir cap again and look at the fluid level. CAUTION ■ Checking the fluid level Take care, as the reservoir may be hot. 4 ■ When adding fluid Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged. ■ After replacing the reservoir cap Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage. 313 Maintenance and care NOTICE 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Battery Check the battery as follows. ■ Battery exterior Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps. Terminals Hold-down clamp ■ Checking battery condition Check the battery condition using the indicator color. Blue: Good condition White: Charging is necessary. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. Red: Not working properly, have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer. 314 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Before recharging When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging: ● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable. ● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon- necting the charger cables to the battery. ■ After recharging the battery The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system. 1. Shift the shift lever to P. 2. Open and close any of the doors. 3. Restart the engine. 4 Maintenance and care 315 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ Chemicals in the battery: A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery: ● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools. ● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery. ● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. ● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte. ● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery. ● Keep children away from the battery. ■ Where to safety charge the battery Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation. ■ How to recharge the battery Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate. ■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte ● If electrolyte gets in your eyes Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility. ● If electrolyte gets on your skin Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately. ● If electrolyte gets on your clothes It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary. ● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately. 316 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE ■ When recharging the battery Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off. Washer fluid If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid. 4 ■ When refilling the washer fluid Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc. NOTICE ■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces. ■ Diluting washer fluid Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank. 317 Maintenance and care CAUTION 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Tires Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear. ■ Checking tires New tread Treadwear indicator Worn tread The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the TWI or marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire. Check spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated. ■ Tire rotation If equipped with full-size spare tire Rotate the tires in the order shown. Front 318 To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance If equipped with compact spare tire Rotate the tires in the order shown. Front To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection. ■ The tire pressure warning system Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valve and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 366) Vehicles with compact spare tire: The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters. 4 When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valve and transmitters must also be installed. When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 321) 319 Maintenance and care Installing tire pressure warning valve and transmitters 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Initializing the tire pressure warning system ■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances: ● When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc. When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark. ■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system STEP 1 Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed. STEP 2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (P. 417) Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level. STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 320 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode. Push and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly three times. Wait for a few minutes with the IGNITION ON mode, and then turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Registering and selecting ID codes ■ Registering ID codes 2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can be registered. Once a second set of tires is registered at “2nd”, you can switch between tire set settings simply by pressing the tire pressure warning select switch. There are 2 settings: “MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered. “2nd” position: The ID code is not registered. When you replace a new set of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and transmitters from your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code registered by your Lexus dealer. MAIN 2nd 321 4 Maintenance and care ■ Selecting ID codes When replacing tires, make sure to select the ID code set that matches the new tire set. If the tire pressure select switch is set to the wrong tire setting, the tire pressure warning system will not operate properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires Tires should be replaced if: ● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage ● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer. ■ Replacing tires and wheels If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction. ■ Tire life Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious. ■ If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires The effectiveness of snow tires is lost. ■ Maximum load of tire Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label. (P. 326, 423). 322 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Tire types 1 Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. 2 All season tires All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving. 3 Snow tires ■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level. ■ If you push the tire pressure reset switch accidentally If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again. ■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not flash 3 times. ● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes. 323 4 Maintenance and care For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 169) 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks. ■ Tire pressure warning system certification For vehicles sold in the USA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 324 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ When inspecting or replacing tires Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to fatal or injury accidents. ● Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear. ● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus. ● Do not mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-ply tires. ● Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires. ● Do not tow the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed. ■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal. ■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning valves and trans- mitters When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly. ■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires. ■ Driving on rough roads Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body. ■ If tire inflation pressures become low while driving Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined. 325 Maintenance and care NOTICE 4 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Tire inflation pressure ■ Tire inflation pressure The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 417) 326 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Inspection and adjustment procedure Tire valve Tire pressure gauge STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 ■ Tire inflation pressure check interval You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do not forget to check the spare. 327 4 Maintenance and care STEP 6 Remove the tire valve cap. Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve. Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge. If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust inflate the tire. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower. After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage. Reinstall the tire valve cap. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following: ● Reduced fuel efficiency ● Reduced driving comfort and tire life ● Reduced safety ● Damage to the drive train If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. ■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following: ● Check only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading. ● Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling. ● Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving. ● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced. 328 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury. ● Excessive wear ● Uneven wear ● Poor handling ● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires ● Poor sealing of the tire bead ● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation ● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards NOTICE 4 ■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure 329 Maintenance and care Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as soon as possible. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Wheels If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control. ■ Wheel selection When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset. Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer. Lexus does not recommend using: ● Wheels of different sizes or types ● Used wheels ● Bent wheels that have been straightened ■ Aluminum wheel precautions ● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels. ● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km). ● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains. ● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels. ■ When replacing wheels The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 320) 330 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ When replacing wheels ● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control. ● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters ● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer. ● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels. 4 Maintenance and care 331 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Air conditioning filter The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency. ■ Replacement method STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. Open the glove box. Remove STEP 2 the glove box cover. STEP 3 Remove the filter cover. STEP 4 Remove the filter. Be sure that the correct side of the filter faces up when installing it. 332 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Cleaning method If the filter is dirty, clean by blowing compressed air through the filter from the downward side. Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm) from the filter and blow for approximately 2 minutes at 72 psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm2 or bar). If it is not available, have the filter cleaned by your Lexus dealer. ■ Checking interval ■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the system ● When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed. ● When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water. 333 4 Maintenance and care Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more frequent cleaning or early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner's Manual Supplement/ Scheduled Maintenance”.) 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Electronic key battery Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged. ■ You will need the following items: ● Flathead screwdriver ● Small Phillips-head screwdriver ● Lithium battery (CR1632) ■ Replacing the battery STEP 1 Take out the mechanical key. STEP 2 Remove the cover. STEP 3 Remove the depleted battery. Insert a new battery with the + terminal facing up. 334 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ If the electronic key battery is discharged The following symptoms may occur. ● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not function properly. ● The operational range is reduced. ■ Use a CR1632 lithium battery ● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores. ● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer. ● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws. CAUTION ■ Removed battery and other parts Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking. 4 Maintenance and care NOTICE ■ For normal operation after replacing the battery Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. ● Always work with dry hands. Moisture may cause the battery to rust. ● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control. ● Do not bend either of the battery terminals. 335 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Checking and replacing fuses If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. Remove the engine compartment cover. P. 304 Open the fuse box cover. Engine compartment Push the tabs in and lift the lid off. Driver's side panel Remove the lid. STEP 4 STEP 5 336 instrument After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” (P. 338) for details about which fuse to check. Remove the fuse with the pullout tool. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 6 Check if the fuse has blown. Type A Normal fuse Blown fuse Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid. Type B Normal fuse Blown fuse Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. 4 Maintenance and care Type C Normal fuse Blown fuse Contact your Lexus dealer. 337 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse layout and amperage ratings ■ Engine compartment Fuse Ampere Circuit 1 PSB 30 A 2 H-LP CLN 30 A 3 P-P / SEAT 30 A Power seat 4 RR DEF 50 A Rear window defogger 5 ABS NO.2 30 A Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system 6 FAN MAIN 50 A Electric cooling fans 7 ABS NO.1 50 A Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system 8 HTR 50 A Air conditioning system 9 RR FOG 10 A 10 ALT-CDS 10 A Alternator condenser 11 ST 30 A Starting system 338 Pre-collision seat belt 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit 12 ALT 140 A PSB, H-LP CLN, P-P/SEAT, RR DEF, ABS NO.2, FAN MAIN, ABS NO.1, HTR, RR FOG, RR DOOR RH, RR DOOR LH, FUEL OPN, FR FOG, OBD, STOP, TI & TE, A/C, PWR, DOOR NO.2, S/ROOF, GAUGE NO.2, POWER, P/SEAT 13 STR LOCK 20 A Steering lock system 14 IG2 20 A GAUGE NO.2, IGN, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system 15 HAZ 15 A Turn signal lights 16 ETCS 10 A Electronic throttle control system 17 E-ACM 10 A Electric active control mount 18 A/C CTRL PNL 15 A Air conditioning system 19 ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system 20 AM2 7.5 A Starting system 21 EFI MAIN 30 A EFI NO.2, EFI NO.3, fuel system, ECT system 22 AMP 30 A Audio system 23 AMP2 30 A Audio system 24 DOOR NO.1 25 A Power door lock system 25 RADIO NO.1 15 A Audio system 26 ECU-B NO.1 10 A ECU powers 27 DOME 10 A Interior lights, meters, vanity lights 28 H-LP (LH) 15 A Left-hand headlight (high beam) 29 H-LP (RH) 15 A Right-hand headlight (high beam) 4 Maintenance and care 339 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit 30 H-LP (LL) 15 A Left-hand headlight (low beam) 31 H-LP (RL) 15 A Right-hand headlight (low beam) 32 HORN 10 A Horns 33 EFI NO.1 10 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, ECT system 34 MPX-B 10 A Meters 35 A/F 20 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 36 S-HORN 7.5 A Horn 15 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 10 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 37 38 340 EFI NO.2 EFI NO.3 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Driver’s side instrument panel Fuse Ampere Circuit RR DOOR RH 25 A Power window 2 RR DOOR LH 25 A Power window 3 FUEL OPN 7.5 A Fuel filler door opener 4 FR FOG 15 A Front fog lights 5 OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system 6 ECU-B NO.2 7.5 A ECU powers 7 STOP 10 A Stop lights 8 TI & TE 30 A Tilt and telescopic steering 9 A/C 7.5 A Air conditioning system 10 PWR 25 A Power windows 11 DOOR NO.2 25 A Main body ECU 12 S/ROOF 30 A Moon roof 13 TAIL 10 A Front and rear side marker lights, tail lights, license plate lights 14 PANEL 7.5 A Switch illumination 4 Maintenance and care 1 341 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse 15 ECU-IG NO. 1 Ampere Circuit 10 A Moon roof, seat heaters, power windows, clock, automatic windshield wiper, electric cooling fans, driving position memory system, seat position memory system 16 ECU-IG NO. 2 7.5 A Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system, traction control system, brake assist system, cruise control system, stop lights, shift lock control system 17 A/C NO. 2 10 A Air conditioning system, rear window defogger 18 WASH 10 A Windshield washer 19 S-HTR 20 A Seat heaters, air conditioning system 20 GAUGE NO. 1 10 A Emergency flashers, back-up lights, rear sunshade, charging system 21 WIP 25 A Windshield wipers 22 H-LP LVL 7.5 A Headlight leveling system 23 IGN 10 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, SRS airbag system, steering lock system 24 GAUGE NO. 2 7.5 A Meters 25 ECU-ACC 7.5 A Clock, main body ECU 26 CIG 20 A Cigarette lighter 27 PWR OUTLET 20 A Power outlet 28 RADIO NO. 2 7.5 A Audio system 29 MIR HTR 15 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers 342 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit 30 POWER 30 A Power window 31 P/SEAT 30 A Power seat ■ After a fuse is replaced ● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (P. 345) ● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ If there is an overload in the circuits The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged. CAUTION 4 ■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire ● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse. ● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent. Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix. This can cause extensive damage or even fire. ● Do not modify fuses or the fuse box. NOTICE ■ Before replacing fuses Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer. 343 Maintenance and care Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Headlight aim (vehicles with discharge headlights) ■ Vertical movement adjusting bolts Adjustment bolt A Adjustment bolt B ■ Before checking the headlight aim STEP 1 Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around the headlight is not deformed. STEP 2 Park the vehicle on level ground. STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat. STEP 4 Bounce the vehicle several times. ■ Adjusting the headlight aim Turn bolt A in either direction STEP 1 using a Phillips-head screwdriver. Remember the turning direction and the number of turns in mind. STEP 2 Turn bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step 1 using a Phillips-head screwdriver. If the error is over the value specified above, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim. 344 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Light bulbs You may replace the following bulbs yourself. For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Prepare a replacement light bulb. Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 419) ■ Remove the engine compartment cover. P. 304 ■ Front bulb locations Headlight high beam Headlight low beam (halogen bulb) 4 Parking light Maintenance and care Front side marker light Front turn signal light ■ Rear bulb locations Rear side marker light Stop/tail light Rear turn signal light 345 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Replacing light bulbs ■ Headlight low beams (for vehicles without discharge bulbs) Unplug the connector. STEP 1 STEP 2 Remove the cover. STEP 3 Release the lock. 346 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 4 Remove the light bulb. ■ Headlight high beams STEP 1 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 4 Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release. ■ Parking lights and front side marker lights, front turn signal lights Remove the access hole cover. STEP 1 347 Maintenance and care STEP 2 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 2 Parking light and front side marker light Front turn signal light Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. Parking light and front side marker light Remove the light bulb. STEP 3 Front turn signal light STEP 3 348 Remove the light bulb. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Stop/tail, rear turn signal and rear side marker lights Open the trunk lid and remove the STEP 1 access hole cover. STEP 2 Stop/tail light Rear turn signal light Rear side marker light Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 4 STEP 3 Maintenance and care Stop/tail light Remove the light bulb. 349 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Rear turn signal light STEP 3 Remove the light bulb. Rear side marker light STEP 3 Remove the light bulb. ■ Bulbs other than the above If any of the bulbs listed below has burnt out, have your Lexus dealer replace it. ● Headlight low beams (discharge bulbs) ● Front fog lights ● Tail lights ● High mounted stoplight ● License plate lights ● Back-up lights 350 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. ● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens. ● Water has built up inside the headlight. ■ Discharge headlights If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is restored. ■ LED stop lights The high mounted stoplight consists of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced. 4 Maintenance and care 351 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ Replacing light bulbs ● Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turn- ing off the headlights. The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns. ● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion. If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack. ● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens. ● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam headlight bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits, or related components. Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death. ■ Discharge headlights ● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing discharge headlights (including light bulbs). ● Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the headlights are turned on. An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged and could result in serious injury or death by electric shock. ■ To prevent damage or fire Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked. 352 When trouble arises 5-1. Essential information................... 354 5 If the vehicle becomes stuck........................................ 407 If your vehicle needs to be towed ...................................... 354 If you think something is wrong ...................................... 360 Fuel pump shut off system ...................................... 361 Event data recorder .............. 362 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency.................... 364 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ................................. 364 If a warning message is displayed ................................ 375 If you have a flat tire.............. 386 If the engine will not start.......................................... 396 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P....................... 398 If you lose your keys............... 399 If the electronic key does not operate properly ......... 400 If the vehicle battery is discharged............................ 402 If your vehicle overheats .............................. 405 353 5-1. Essential information If your vehicle needs to be towed If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat bed truck. Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws. If towing from the front, the vehicle’s rear wheels and axles must be in good condition. (P. 358) If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck. Before towing The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Lexus dealer before towing. ● The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move. ● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound. Emergency towing If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. This should only attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition. Towing eyelet 354 5-1. Essential information ■ Emergency towing procedure STEP 1 Release the parking brake. STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to N. STEP 3 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode (engine off) or IGNITION ON mode (engine running) position. CAUTION ■ Caution while towing ● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. ● If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult. NOTICE ■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission Never tow this vehicle from the rear with front wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission. 5 STEP 1 Remove the eyelet cover using a flat head screwdriver. To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body, as shown in the illustration. 355 When trouble arises Installing towing eyelet 5-1. Essential information STEP 2 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand. STEP 3 Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench. ■ Location of the emergency towing eyelet P. 386 CAUTION ■ Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle Make sure that towing eyelet are installed securely. If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing. This may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death. 356 5-1. Essential information Towing with a sling-type truck NOTICE ■ To prevent body damage Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear. 5 When trouble arises 357 5-1. Essential information Towing with a wheel lift-type truck From the front Release the parking brake. NOTICE ■ To prevent damaging the vehicle When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed. From the rear Use a towing dolly under the front wheel. NOTICE ■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground. 358 5-1. Essential information Using a flat bed truck If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration. Front If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45. Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged. NOTICE 5 ■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle When trouble arises Do not use the rear transport eyelets. They are used for shipping purposes only. 359 5-1. Essential information If you think something is wrong If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ■ Visible symptoms ● Fluid leaks under the vehicle (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.) ● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear ● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal ■ Audible symptoms ● Changes in exhaust sound ● Excessive tire squeal when cornering ● Strange noises related to the suspension system ● Pinging or other noises related to the engine ■ Operational symptoms ● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough ● Appreciable loss of power ● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking ● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road ● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor 360 5-1. Essential information Fuel pump shut off system To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine. Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated. STEP 1 STEP 2 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode or OFF. Restart the engine. NOTICE ■ Before starting the engine Inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine. 5 When trouble arises 361 5-1. Essential information Event data recorder Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a system to that record data in a crash or a near car crash event. In a crash or a near car crash event The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following information: ● Engine speed ● Whether the brake pedal was applied or not ● Vehicle speed ● To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed ● Position of the transmission shift lever ● Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not ● Driver's seat position ● SRS airbag deployment data ● SRS airbag system diagnostic data ● Front passenger's occupant classification The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers. 362 5-1. Essential information Disclosure of the data Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when: ● An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained ● Officially requested by the police or other authorities ● Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit ● Ordered by a court law However, if necessary Lexus will: ● Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance ● Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary ● Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non-Lexus organization for research purposes 5 When trouble arises 363 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous. The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Warning light (USA) (Canada) Warning light/Details Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)* Indicates the following; • Low brake fluid • Malfunction in the brake booster system This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally. *: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer: P. 378 364 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Stop the vehicle immediately. The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Warning light Warning light/Details Charging system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system. (USA) (Canada) Malfunction indicator lamp Indicates the following: • Empty fuel tank • Loose fuel tank • Malfunction in the electronic engine control system; • Malfunction in the electronic throttle control system; or • Malfunction in the electronic automatic transmission control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Warning light Warning light/Details SRS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: • The SRS airbag system; or • Front passenger occupant classification system • The seat belt pretensioner system. 365 5 When trouble arises Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning light (USA) Warning light/Details ABS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: • The ABS; or • The brake assist system. (Canada) Pre-collision system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system. Follow the correction procedure. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off. Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure Open door warning light Check that all doors and the (warning buzzer*1) Indicates that a door or trunk trunk are closed. is not fully closed. Rear light failure warning light Indicates one or more stop lights are burned out. Have the defective bulbs replaced by your Lexus dealer. Low fuel level warning light Indicates remaining fuel level is low. Refuel the vehicle. (Approximately 2.8 gal. [10.5 L, 2.3 Imp.gal.] or less) 366 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure Driver’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer*2) Fasten the seat belt. Warns the driver to fasten his or her seat belt. (with navigation system) (without navigation system) Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer*2) Fasten the seat belt. Warns the front passenger to fasten his or her seat belt. Tire pressure warning light When the light comes on: Low tire inflation pressure. Adjust the tire inflation pressure. When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute: Have the system checked by Malfunction in the tire presyour Lexus dealer. sure warning system 5 When trouble arises 367 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning light Warning light/Details Master warning light A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction. Correction procedure P. 375 *1: Open door warning buzzer: P. 378 *2: Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt reminders: The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts reminder sounds to alert the driver and front passenger that his or her sear belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds. ■ First check when the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving Check the following: ● Is the fuel tank empty? If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately. ● Is the fuel tank cap loose? If it is, tighten it securely. The lamp will go off after taking several driving trips. If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 368 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ SRS warning light This warning light system monitors the following: • • • • • • • • • • • • The airbag sensor assembly The front airbag sensors The side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies The curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies The driver’s seat position sensor The driver’s seat belt buckle switch Occupant detection system (ECU and sensors) AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch The seat belt pretensioner assemblies The inflators The interconnecting wiring and power sources ■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat, depending on its weight, the reminder light may flash and buzzer may sound. ■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light. ■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes 369 5 When trouble arises The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes). 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire Full-size spare tire The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the spare tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the tire pressure warning light does not turn off. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few minutes. Compact spare tire The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few minutes. 370 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.) ● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used. ● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not regis- tered in the tire pressure warning computer. ● If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to a different tire setting. ● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher. The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.) ● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby. ● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle. ● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed (vehicles with full- size spare tire). ● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or wheel housings. ● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used. (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.) ● If tire chains are used. ● If the full-size spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal recep- 5 tion. trunk (vehicles with full-size spare tire). 371 When trouble arises ● If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in the 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled. (Customizable features P. 435) CAUTION ■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury. ● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pres- sure immediately. ● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust- ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer. ● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes. ■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately. 372 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ Maintenance of the tires Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly. 373 5 When trouble arises Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency NOTICE ■ Precaution when installing a different tire When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly. 374 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If a warning message is displayed If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions: Master warning light The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display. Multi-information display If any of the warning message turns on again after performing the following actions, contact your Lexus dealer. Stop the vehicle immediately. The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Warning message 5 Details When trouble arises Indicates an abnormal engine oil pressure. A buzzer also sounds. (Flashing) 375 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Warning message Details Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock system. A buzzer also sounds. (Flashing) Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system. A buzzer also sounds. (If equipped) 376 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Indicates intuitive parking assist malfunction. A buzzer also sounds. The malfunctioning assist-sensor is shown flashing on the display. (If equipped) (Flashing) (Flashing) Indicates a malfunction in the radar cruise control system. A buzzer also sounds. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Switch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF and then to IGNITION ON mode again to reset the cruise control system. (If equipped) 5 When trouble arises Indicates a malfunction in the TRAC and VSC systems. 377 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Follow the correction procedure. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message turns off. Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed. The system also indicates which doors are not fully closed. flashes and a Make sure that all of the doors are closed. buzzer sounds to indicate that one or more of the doors is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). Indicates that the hood is not fully closed. flashes and a buzzer sounds to indiClose the hood. cate that hood is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). 378 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that the trunk is not fully closed. flashes and a buzzer sounds to indiClose the trunk. cate that trunk is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). (Flashing) Close the moon roof. Indicates that the parking brake is still engaged Release the parking (with the vehicle having reached a speed of more brake. than 3 mph [5 km/h]). A buzzer also sounds. 5 When trouble arises (Flashing) Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed (with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and the driver’s door opened). A buzzer also sounds. Indicates that the washer fluid level is low. Add washer fluid. A buzzer also sounds. 379 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that engine oil level is low. A buzzer also sounds. Check the level of engine oil, and add if necessary. Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed. A buzzer also sounds. (USA only) Comes on approximately Check and the engine oil, 4500 miles (7200 km) and change if necessary. after the engine oil is changed. (The indicator will not work properly unless the oil maintenance data has been reset.) Indicates that the engine oil should be changed. A buzzer also sounds. (USA only) 380 Comes on approximately Check and change the 5000 miles (8000 km) engine oil. after the engine oil is changed (and the oil maintenance data has been reset). 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message (Flashing) Details Indicates that the precollision system is not currently functional. A buzzer also sounds. Clean the grille and the sensor. This message appears when the pre-collision system is hot. In this case, wait until the system cools down. Indicates that the sensor of intuitive parking assist is dirty or covered with ice. A buzzer also sounds. Clean the sensor. (If equipped) (If equipped) (If equipped) (Flashing) Indicates that the radar cruise control sensor is dirty or covered with ice. A buzzer also sounds. 5 Clean the sensor. When trouble arises (Flashing) Correction procedure 381 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Correction procedure (Flashing and then continuously on) Indicates that the radar cruise control system is unable to judge vehicleto-vehicle distance because the windshield wipers are set at high speed operation mode. A buzzer also sounds. Turn them off or set them to either the intermittent or the slow mode. Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle ahead (in radar cruise mode). A buzzer also sounds. Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes. (Flashing) (If equipped) (Flashing) (If equipped) ■ Changing the engine oil (USA only) Make sure to reset the oil change system. (P. 305) ■ Warning light display in radar cruise mode In the following cases, the warning light may not be displayed even if vehicle-tovehicle distance closes. ● When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle ● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed ● Immediately after cruise control speed is set ● At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed 382 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Follow the correction procedure for problem in smart access system with push-button start. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message turns off. Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer Once Warning message (Comes on for 8 seconds.) (Flashing) (Flashing) Correction procedure Indicates that an attempt was made to start the engine without the electronic key being present, or the electronic key was not functioning normally. Start the engine with the electronic key present.* Indicates that a door other than the driver’s door has been opened and closed with the “ENGINE Confirm the locaSTART STOP” tion of the elecswitch in any tronic key. mode other than OFF and the electronic key outside of the detection area. 383 5 When trouble arises Once 3 times Details 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer Warning message Once 3 times (Flashing) Con- Continuous tinuous (Displayed alternately) (Flashing) Once Correction procedure Indicates that the driver’s door has been opened or closed with the shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in any mode other than OFF and the electronic key outside of the detection area. Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF or confirm the location of the electronic key. Indicates that the driver’s door has been opened or closed with the shift lever out of in • Shift the shift lever to P. P, the “ENGINE • Confirm the START STOP” location of the switch in any electronic key. mode other than OFF and the electronic key outside of the detection area. Indicates that the key battery is low. (Flashing) 384 Details Replace the battery. (P. 334) 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer Warning message (Comes on for 15 seconds.) Details Correction procedure Indicates that a door has been opened or closed and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been switched twice to ACCESSORY mode from OFF. Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while applying the brakes. Indicates that the steering lock has not released. Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch again while turning the steering wheel with the brake pedal depressed. (Flashing) 5 Indicates that the electronic key does not operate properly. When trouble arises Once P. 401 *: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle, the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties receiving the signal from the key. (P. 26) 385 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If you have a flat tire Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided. ■ Before jacking up the vehicle ● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface. ● Set the parking brake. ● Shift the shift lever to P. ● Stop the engine. ● Turn on the emergency flashers. ■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools Towing eyelet Jack handle Spare tire 386 Wrench Jack Compact spare tire 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Taking out the jack STEP 1 Lift up the hook of the panel on the trunk floor. STEP 2 Secure the panel using the hook provided. STEP 3 Remove the hook. 5 When trouble arises 387 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Taking out the spare tire STEP 1 Lift up the hook of the panel on the trunk floor. STEP 2 Secure the panel using the hook provided. STEP 3 Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire. 388 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Replacing a flat tire STEP 1 Chock the tires. Flat tire Left-hand side Front Righthand side Left-hand side Rear Righthand side STEP 2 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn). Turn the jack portion “A” by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point. 389 5 When trouble arises STEP 3 Wheel chock positions Behind the rear righthand side tire Behind the rear lefthand side tire In front of the front righthand side tire In front of the front lefthand side tire 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency STEP 4 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground. STEP 5 Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire. When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface. Installing the spare tire STEP 1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface. If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, and the tire may come off the vehicle. 390 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency STEP 2 Washer Wheel nut Disc wheel Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each nut by hand to approximately the same amount. Turn the lug nuts until the washers come into contact with the wheel. STEP 3 Lower the vehicle. STEP 4 Firmly tighten each nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration. 5 Tightening torque: 10.5 kgf•m (103 N•m, 76 ft•lbf) When trouble arises STEP 5 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools. 391 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ The compact spare tire ● The compact spare tire is identified by the label TEMPORARY USE ONLY on the tire sidewall. Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency. ● Make sure to check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire. (P. 417) ■ When using the compact spare tire As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on. ■ If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice (vehicles with com- pact spare tire) Install the compact spare tire on the rear of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires. STEP 1 Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire. STEP 2 Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehi- cle. STEP 3 Fit tire chains to the front tires. ■ After completing the tire change The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 320) 392 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ Using the tire jack Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or injuries due to the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack. ● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains. ● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire. Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle. ● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point. ● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack. ● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it. ● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire. ● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle. Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle may be injured. ■ Replacing a flat tire 5 Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury. The oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. ● Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 10.5 kgf•m (103 N•m, 76 ft•lbf) as soon as possible after changing wheels. Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury. 393 When trouble arises ● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ When using the compact spare tire ● Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle. ● Do not use two compact spare tires simultaneously. ● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible. ● Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering. ■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle. The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury. ■ When the compact spare tire attached The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly: ● ABS & Brake assist ● VSC ● TRAC ● Navigation system (if equipped) 394 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency NOTICE ■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire. Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair. ■ When replacing the tires When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly. ■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires. ■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle. The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces. ■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire. Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance. 5 When trouble arises 395 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the engine will not start If the engine will not start, even though correct starting procedures are being followed (P. 116), consider each of the following points. ■ The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates normally. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. ● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank. Add fuel to the vehicle. ● The engine may be flooded. Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting procedures. (P. 116) ● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (P. 70) ■ The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. ● The battery may be discharged. (P. 402) ● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded. ■ The starter motor does not turn over One of the following may be the cause of the problem. ● The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However, an interim measure is available to start the engine. (P. 397) 396 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. ● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected. ● The battery may be discharged. (P. 402) ● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system. Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown. Emergency start function When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is functioning normally. Set the parking brake. STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to P. STEP 3 Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY mode. STEP 4 Push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly. Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. STEP 1 When trouble arises 397 5 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Set the parking brake. Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY mode. Depress the brake pedal. Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent. Press the shift lock override button. The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed. 398 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If you lose your keys New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. 5 When trouble arises 399 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the electronic key does not operate properly If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (P. 26) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure below. Locking and unlocking the doors and key linked functions Remove the cover on the driver’s door handle using the mechanical key in order to perform the following operations. Locks all doors Closes the windows/standard moon roof (turn and hold) Unlocks the door Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key once again unlocks the other doors. Opens the windows/standard moon roof (turn and hold) Return the cover to the original position after use. 400 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes and starting the engine STEP 1 STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes. Touch the Lexus emblem side of the electronic key to the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. An alarm will sound to indicate that the start function cannot detect the electronic key that is touched to the “ENGINE START STOP” switch if any of the doors is opened and closed while the key is touched to the switch. To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 116) To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch within 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake pedal depressed. In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be operated, contact your Lexus dealer. STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stopping the engine. ■ Replacing the key battery As the above procedure is the temporary measure, it is recommend that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes. (P. 334) 401 When trouble arises ■ Stopping the engine 5 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the vehicle battery is discharged The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged. You can call your Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop. If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps below. STEP 1 Remove the cover. STEP 2 Connecting the jumper cables. If required, remove all vent plugs from the booster battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery. (This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.) Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illustration. 402 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle. STEP 4 Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. STEP 5 Maintain the engine speed on the second vehicle and turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the IGNITION ON mode, then start the vehicle’s engine. STEP 6 Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected. Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. STEP 3 ■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged The engine cannot be started by push-starting. ■ Avoiding a discharged battery 5 ● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned off. ● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a When trouble arises low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc. 403 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery. ● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal. ● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” termi- nals. ● Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the battery. ■ Battery precautions The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery. ● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body. ● Do not lean over the battery. ● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immedi- ately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received. ● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts. ● Do not allow children near the battery. NOTICE ■ When handling jumper cables Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them. 404 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If your vehicle overheats If your engine overheats: STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Add engine coolant if required. Water can be used in an emergency measure if engine coolant is unavailable. (P. 414) 405 5 When trouble arises STEP 6 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the automatic air conditioning system. Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood. If you see steam: Stop the engine and carefully lift the hood. If you do not see steam: Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood. Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 304) Check to see if the cooling fan is operating. If the fan is operating: Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine. If the fan is not operating: Stop the engine immediately and call your local Lexus dealer. After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, check the engine coolant level and inspect the radiator core (radiator) for any leaks. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency STEP 7 Install the reservoir cap. Make sure that the engine coolant reservoir hose is positioned as shown in the illustration. Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ■ Overheating If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating. ● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is experienced. ● Steam is coming from under the hood. CAUTION ■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle ● Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the engine is running. ● Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure. NOTICE ■ When adding engine coolant Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant. When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine. 406 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the vehicle becomes stuck Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. ● Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift lever in P. ● Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire. ● Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction under the tires. ● Restart the engine. ● Carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle. CAUTION ■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution. ■ When shifting the shift lever NOTICE ■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components ● Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine. ● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require towing to be freed. 407 5 When trouble arises Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency 408 Vehicle specifications 6 6-1. Specifications.................. 410 Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) ............... 410 Fuel information..................... 420 Tire information...................... 423 6-2. Customization................ 435 Customizable features ........ 435 6-3. Initialization ................... 440 Items to initialize .................... 440 409 6-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) Dimensions and weight Overall length 191.1 in. (4855 mm) Overall width 71.7 in. (1820 mm) Overall height * 57.1 in. (1450 mm) Wheelbase 109.3 in. (2775 mm) Tread Front 62.0 in. (1575 mm) Rear 61.6 in. (1565 mm) Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage) 900 lb. (410 kg) Towing capacity (trailer weight + cargo weight) 1000 lb. (450 kg) *: Unladen vehicle 410 6-1. Specifications Vehicle identification ■ Vehicle identification The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle. This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel. This number is also on the Certification Label. ■ Engine number 411 6 Vehicle specifications The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown. 6-1. Specifications Engine Model 2GR-FE Type 6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline Bore and stroke 3.70 3.27 in. (94.0 83.0 mm) Displacement 210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3) Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment Fuel Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only Octane rating 91 (Research octane number 96) or higher Fuel tank capacity 18.5 gal. (70 L, 15.4 lmp.gal) 412 6-1. Specifications Lubrication system Oil capacity (drain and refill) with filter 6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.3 lmp.qt.) without filter 6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 lmp.qt.) Oil grade ILSAC multi-grade engine oil Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the grade and viscosity shown below. Recommended oil viscosity Outside temperature 5W-30 is an oil that provides optimal levels of fuel efficiency. Oil viscosity ● The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition. 413 6 Vehicle specifications ● The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather. 6-1. Specifications Cooling system Capacity 9.5 qt. (9.0 L, 7.9 lmp.qt.) Coolant type Use either of the following. • “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” • Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life organic acid technology Do not use plain water alone. Ignition system Spark plug Make DENSO Gap FK20HR11 0.043 in. (1.1 mm) NOTICE ■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs Use only above spark plugs. Do not adjust gaps for your engine performance or smooth driveability. 414 6-1. Specifications Electrical system Battery Open voltage at 68F (20C): 12.6 12.8 V Fully charged 12.2 12.4 V Half charged 11.8 12.0 V Discharged (Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the engine and all the lights are turned off) Charging rates 5 A max. Automatic Transaxle Fluid capacity* 6.76 qt. (6.4 L, 5.63 lmp.qt.) Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS *: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer. NOTICE Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transaxle accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transaxle of your vehicle. 6 Vehicle specifications 415 6-1. Specifications Brakes Pedal clearance *1 2.4 in. (61 mm) Min. Pedal free play 0.04 0.24 in. (1.0 6.0 mm) Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm) Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm) Parking brake pedal travel *2 7 10 clicks Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 *1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112 lbf (500 N, 51 kgf) while the engine is running. *2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N, 30.6 kgf). Steering Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm) Power steering fluid Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III 416 6-1. Specifications Tires and wheels Type A Tire size P215/55R17 93V Driving under normal conditions Front: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) When driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are Tire inflation pressure permitted by law, add 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/ (Recommended cold tire inflation cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure) pressure indicated on the tire sidewall. Towing a trailer Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) 17 7J Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) Vehicle specifications Wheel size 6 417 6-1. Specifications Type B Tire size P215/55R17 93V, T155/70D17 110M (spare) Driving under normal conditions Front: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) *:When driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h), in countries where such Tire inflation pressure speeds are permitted by law, add 4.3 psi (Recommended cold tire inflation (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front pressure) tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall. Towing a trailer Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) Wheel size 17 7J, 17 4T (spare) Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) 418 6-1. Specifications Light bulbs Light Bulbs Exterior Interior Bulb No. W Type Headlights (low beam) Discharge bulbs* Halogen bulbs* D4S H7 35 55 A B Headlights (high beam) 9005 60 C Front fog lights 9006 51 D Front turn signal lights 21 E Parking lights and front side marker lights 5 F Trunk light 5 G Rear side marker lights 194 3.8 F Stop/tail lights 7443 21/5 F Tail lights 7443 5 F Rear turn signal lights 21 E Back-up lights 921 16 F Outer foot lights 5 F Vanity lights 8 F Door courtesy lights 5 F 6 Vehicle specifications *: If equipped A: B: C: D: E: F: G: D4S discharge bulbs H7 halogen bulbs HB3 halogen bulbs HB4 halogen bulbs Wedge base bulbs (amber) Wedge base bulbs (clear) Double end bulbs 419 6-1. Specifications Fuel information Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline. Premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada. ■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps. ■ If premium gasoline is not available If 91 rating gasoline cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91). ■ If your engine knocks ● Consult your Lexus dealer. ● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern. ■ Gasoline quality In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer. 420 6-1. Specifications ■ Gasoline quality standards ● Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide. ● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted. ● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better performance. ■ Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives ● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits. ● All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems. ■ Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas. Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. ■ Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline ● Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate con- tent is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE. ● If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87. 6 ● Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol. Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service. 421 Vehicle specifications ■ Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT 6-1. Specifications NOTICE ■ Notice on gasoline quality ● Do not use leaded gasoline. Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction. ● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here. Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems. ● Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline. ■ Fuel-related poor driveability If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel. ■ When refueling with gasohol Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint. 422 6-1. Specifications Tire information Typical tire symbols Standard tire Compact spare tire 6 Vehicle specifications 423 6-1. Specifications Tire size DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) Location of treadwear indicators Tire ply composition and materials (P. 425) (P. 425) (P. 318) Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire. Radial tires or bias-ply tires A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a bias-ply tire. TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure. Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 322) (P. 417) This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. Uniform tire quality grading For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows. Summer tire or all season tire (P. 323) An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire. TEMPORARY USE ONLY (P. 392) A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only. 424 6-1. Specifications Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN) DOT symbol* Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire manufacturer's identification mark Tire size code Manufacturer's optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters) Manufacturing week Manufacturing year *: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Tire size ■ Typical tire size information The illustration indicates typical tire size. Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use) Section width (millimeters) Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal) Wheel diameter (inches) Load index (2 or 3 digits) Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter) 6 Vehicle specifications 425 6-1. Specifications ■ Tire dimensions Section width Tire height Wheel diameter Tire section names Bead Sidewall Shoulder Tread Belt Inner liner Reinforcing rubber Carcass Rim lines Bead wires Chafer Uniform Tire Quality Grading This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S.A. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading. Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. 426 6-1. Specifications ■ DOT quality grades All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A ■ Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. ■ Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. 6 Vehicle specifications 427 6-1. Specifications ■ Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Glossary of tire terminology Tire related term Meaning Cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition Maximum inflation pressure The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire Recommended inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer Accessory weight The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not) 428 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of: (a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight (d) Production options weight Normal occupant weight 150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below Production options weight The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty 12-volt battery, and special trim Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Nominal diameter of the bead seat Rim size designation Rim diameter and width Rim type designation The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity) The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity 429 6 Vehicle specifications Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning The load on an individual tire that is determined by Vehicle maximum load on distributing to each axle its share of the maximum the tire loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two Vehicle normal load on the tire The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire Bead The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead Bias ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material 430 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Extra load tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass Intended outboard sidewall (a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Light truck (LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum permissible inflation pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated 431 6 Vehicle specifications CT A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire Overall width The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs Passenger car tire A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less. Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies Pneumatic tire A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load Radial ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire Section width The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead 432 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Sidewall separation Snow tire Meaning The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( on at least one sidewall ) Test rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially around a tire Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass Treadwear indicators (TWI) The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing various designated seating capacities 433 Vehicle specifications *:Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for 6 6-1. Specifications Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle 2 through 4 2 2 in front 5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat 11 through 15 5 2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat 16 through 20 7 2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat 434 6-2. Customization Customizable features Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus dealership. Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details. Item Smart access system with push-button start (P. 22) Function Default setting Customized setting Smart access system with push-button start ON OFF Operation signal (Emergency flashers) ON OFF Operation signal (Buzzer) ON OFF 6 Vehicle specifications 435 6-2. Customization Item Function Default setting Customized setting Wireless remote control ON OFF Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps All doors unlocked in one step ON OFF Unlocking operation Automatic door lock function to be activated if door is not opened after being unlocked Wireless remote control (P. 34) Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked Operation signal (Emergency flashers) 30 seconds 60 seconds 120 seconds ON OFF Level 7 Level 0 to 7 Door lock buzzer ON OFF Trunk unlocking function ON OFF Operation signal (Buzzer volume) Trunk unlocking operation Push and hold Panic function 436 ON Push twice One push OFF 6-2. Customization Item Default setting Customized setting Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps All doors unlocked in one step Speed-detecting automatic door lock function OFF ON Opening driver's door unlocks all doors OFF ON Shifting gears to P unlocks all doors ON OFF Shifting gears to position other than P locks all doors. ON OFF Linked mechanical key operation ON (Open and close) OFF Open only Wireless remote control linked operation ON (Open only) OFF ON OFF Function Unlocking using a key Door lock (P. 37) Power windows (P. 60) 6 Vehicle specifications Linked entry function Close only 437 6-2. Customization Item Moon roof (standard type) (P. 63) Automatic light control system (P. 134) Lights (P. 134) Intuitive parking assist (P. 153) 438 Function Default setting Customized setting OFF Linked mechanical key operation ON (Open and close) Open only Linked operation of components when mechanical key is used Slide only Tilt only Wireless remote control linked operation ON (Open only) OFF Linked operation of components when wireless remote control used Slide only Tilt only Linked entry function ON OFF Light sensor sensitivity Level 3 Level 1 to 5 Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed Close only 0 seconds 30 seconds 60 seconds 90 seconds Daytime running light system (USA only) ON OFF Back sensor operation display and buzzer ON OFF Level 3 Level 1 to 5 4.5 ft. (150 cm) 1.8 ft. (60 cm) Buzzer volume Distance which a sensor detects 6-2. Customization Item Illumination (P. 249) Seat belt reminder (P. 366) Function Default setting Time elapsed before lights turn off 15 seconds Customized setting 7.5 seconds 30 seconds Operation when the doors are unlocked ON OFF Operation after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch turned OFF ON OFF Front foot well lighting ON OFF Outer foot light ON OFF Vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer ON OFF Multi-information display (P. 130) Country Canada Available languages English and French 6 Vehicle specifications 439 6-3. Initialization Items to initialize After reconnecting or performing maintenance on the battery, the following items must be initialized for normal system operation. Item When to initialize Reference Engine oil maintenance data (USA only) After changing engine oil P. 305 Tire pressure warning system When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc. P. 319 440 For owners 7 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners..................... 442 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ............................. 443 441 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Tollfree: 1-800-25-LEXUS). If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. 442 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual. See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English. Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité ● Déroulez la sangle diagonale de telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur l'épaule, sans pour autant être en contact avec votre cou ou glisser de votre épaule. ● Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches. ● Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus droit possible et calez-vous bien dans le siège. ● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité. Guide de confort de ceinture de sécurité (sièges arrière extérieurs) 443 7 For owners Si la sangle diagonale est proche du cou de la personne, faites coulisser le guide de confort de ceinture de sécurité vers l'avant. Entretien et soin ■ Ceintures de sécurité Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède. Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées. ATTENTION ■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident. 444 Index Abbreviation list .................... 446 Alphabetical index................. 448 What to do if... ....................... 458 For details of equipment related to the navigation system, such as the audio system and the air conditioning systems, refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. 445 Abbreviation list Abbreviation/Acronym list ABBREVIATIONS MEANING A/C Air Conditioning ABS Anti-Lock Brake System AFS Adaptive Front lighting System AI-SHIFT Artificial Intelligence Shift ALR Automatic Locking Retractor CRS Child Restraint System DISP Display ECU Electronic Control Unit EDR Event data recorder ELR Emergency Locking Retractor GAWR Gross Axle Weight Ratings GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating HI High I/M Emission inspection and maintenance INT Intermittent LED Light Emitting Diode LO Low MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether OBD On Board Diagnostics PCS Pre-Collision System SRS Supplemental Restraint System TIN Tire Identification Number TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System TRAC Traction Control 446 Abbreviation list ABBREVIATIONS MEANING VIN Vehicle Identification Number VSC Vehicle Stability Control 447 Alphabetical index Alphabetical index A A/C .............................................................184 ABS.............................................................. 159 Adaptive front lighting system ......... 135 AFS .............................................................. 135 Air conditioning filter ..........................332 Air conditioning system Air conditioning filter ....................... 332 Automatic air conditioning system................................................... 184 Airbags Airbag operating conditions........... 79 Airbag precautions for your child..........................................................83 Airbag warning light ........................365 Curtain shield airbag operating conditions..............................................80 Curtain shield airbag precautions ..........................................83 Front passenger occupant classification system.........................88 General airbag precautions ...........83 Locations of airbags.............................77 Modification and disposal of airbags.................................................... 87 Proper driving posture ............. 75, 83 Side airbag operating conditions..............................................80 Side airbag precautions ....................83 SRS airbags ..............................................77 448 Alarm.............................................................72 Antenna..................................................... 198 Anti-lock brake system....................... 159 Armrest .................................................... 267 Ashtray...................................................... 262 Audio input............................................... 218 Audio system Antenna....................................................198 Audio input.............................................218 AUX adapter ........................................218 CD player/changer...........................201 MP3/WMA disc................................207 Optimal use ........................................... 215 Portable music player.......................218 Radio ......................................................... 194 Steering wheel audio switch.......... 219 Automatic air conditioning system ..................................................... 184 Automatic headlight leveling system ......................................................136 Automatic light control system.........134 Automatic transmission Automatic transmission .....................119 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P...................................398 S mode .....................................................120 AUX adapter .......................................... 218 Auxiliary box ..........................................258 Alphabetical index B Back-up lights Wattage ...................................................419 Battery Checking.................................................314 If the vehicle has discharged battery.................................................. 402 Preparing and checking before winter......................................169 Bluetooth® ............................................... 221 Brake Fluid..............................................................311 Parking brake........................................ 123 Brake assist ..............................................159 Break-in tips .............................................109 C Care Exterior ................................................... 284 Interior..................................................... 287 Seat belts ...............................................288 Cargo capacity .......................................165 Cargo hooks ...........................................272 CD changer .............................................201 CD player..................................................201 Chains...........................................................171 Child restraint system Booster seats, definition.................... 93 Booster seats, installation................. 98 Convertible seats, definition ........... 93 Convertible seats, installation ........ 98 Front passenger occupant classification system ........................88 Infant seats, definition ......................... 93 Infant seats, installation.......................98 Installing CRS with lower anchorages...........................................101 Installing CRS with seat belts..........98 Installing CRS with top straps....... 102 Child safety Airbag precautions..............................83 Battery precautions ...............316, 404 Child restraint system.........................93 Child-protectors ...................................38 How your child should wear the seat belt ..........................................53 Installing child restraints..................... 97 Moon roof precautions......................66 Power window lock switch..............60 Power window precautions ............62 Removed electronic key battery precautions....................................... 335 Seat belt comfort guide .......................51 Seat belt extender precautions......55 Seat belt precautions ..........................54 Seat heater precautions..................265 Trunk precautions................................. 42 Child-protectors......................................38 Cigarette lighter....................................263 Cleaning Exterior....................................................284 Interior .....................................................287 Seat belts............................................... 288 Clock .......................................................... 261 Compass .................................................. 279 Condenser .................................................311 Console box ...........................................253 449 Alphabetical index Cooling system Engine overheating ..........................405 Cornering assist sensors .................... 153 Cruise control Cruise control .........................................141 Dynamic radar cruise control .......144 Cup holders ............................................256 Curtain shield airbags............................ 77 Customizable features .......................435 D Daytime running light system ........... 135 Defogger Rear window........................................... 191 Side mirror ............................................... 191 Dimension................................................. 410 Dinghy towing......................................... 182 Display Dynamic radar cruise control .......144 Trip information......................................131 Warning message.............................375 Do-it-yourself maintenance .............296 Door courtesy lights Door courtesy lights......................... 249 Wattage....................................................419 Doors Door glasses...........................................60 Door lock................................. 22, 34, 37 Side mirrors.............................................58 Driver's seat belt reminder light .....366 Driving Break-in tips.......................................... 109 Correct posture .................................... 75 Procedures............................................ 108 Winter driving tips...............................169 Driving position memory......................44 450 E Electronic key If the electronic key does not operate properly............................400 Emergency, in case of If the electronic key does not operate properly............................400 If the engine will not start............... 396 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P...................................398 If the vehicle has discharged battery ................................................. 402 If the warning buzzer sounds...... 364 If the warning light turns on.......... 364 If the warning message is displayed.............................................375 If you have a flat tire ........................386 If you lose your keys ........................ 399 If you think something is wrong ..................................................360 If your vehicle becomes stuck .... 407 If your vehicle needs to be towed................................................... 354 If your vehicle overheats................405 Engine Compartment.....................................303 Engine switch ..........................................116 Hood .......................................................300 How to start the engine .....................116 Identification number ..........................411 If the engine will not start............... 396 Ignition switch .........................................116 Overheating ........................................405 Engine compartment cover.............304 Alphabetical index Engine coolant Capacity................................................... 414 Checking...............................................309 Preparing and checking before winter......................................169 Engine coolant temperature gauge....................................................... 124 Engine immobilizer system..................70 Engine oil Capacity...................................................413 Checking...............................................305 Preparing and checking before winter......................................169 Engine oil maintenance data...........308 Event data recorder.............................362 F Floor mat.................................................... 271 Fluid Brake ...........................................................311 Power steering fluid ........................... 312 Washer..................................................... 317 Fog lights Switch........................................................ 137 Wattage ...................................................419 Foot well lighting ...................................249 Front fog lights Switch........................................................ 137 Wattage ...................................................419 Front passenger occupant classification system ........................... 88 Front passenger's seat belt reminder light..................................... 366 Front seats Adjustment...............................................43 Driving position memory..................44 Seat position memory ........................ 47 Front side marker lights Replacing light bulbs........................347 Wattage................................................... 419 Front turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs........................347 Wattage................................................... 419 Fuel Capacity ...................................................412 Fuel gauge...............................................124 Fuel pump shut off system.............. 361 Gas station information................. 460 Information ............................................420 Refueling.................................................... 67 Fuel door ..................................................... 67 Fuel filler door ........................................... 67 Fuel pump shut off system.................. 361 Fuses ..........................................................336 G Garage door opener .......................... 274 Gas station information......................460 Gauges ...................................................... 124 Glove box ................................................252 Glove box light ......................................253 Grocery bag hooks ............................. 272 451 Alphabetical index H Hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) Bluetooth® ............................................. 221 Hands-free phone system (for cellular phone).......................... 221 Head restraints Adjusting .................................................. 49 Headlight aim .........................................344 Headlights Discharge headlights precautions .......................................352 Replacing light bulbs........................345 Switch ........................................................134 Wattage....................................................419 Heaters Seat heaters..........................................265 Side mirror ............................................... 191 Hood ......................................................... 300 Hooks Cargo hooks ........................................272 Grocery bag hooks ..........................272 I 452 I/M test......................................................295 Identification number Engine .........................................................411 Vehicle........................................................411 Ignition switch............................................116 Illuminated entry system ....................249 Indicator lights......................................... 126 Initialization Items to initialize .................................440 Inside rear view mirror .......................... 57 Interior lights Interior lights...........................................251 Switch ........................................................251 Intuitive parking assist.......................... 153 J Jack Positioning a floor jack .....................301 Replacing the wheel ........................386 Jack handle .............................................386 K Keyless entry ............................................. 34 Keys Electronic key .........................................20 Engine switch ..........................................116 If the electronic key does not operate properly............................400 If you lose your keys ........................ 399 Key number..............................................20 Keyless entry............................................34 Keys..............................................................20 Mechanical key ......................................20 Wireless remote control key...........34 L Light bulbs Replacing .............................................. 345 Wattage ................................................... 419 Lights Door courtesy lights .........................249 Fog light switch .................................... 137 Headlights switch................................ 134 Interior light switch ............................249 Outer foot lights..................................249 Personal light switch.......................... 251 Replacing light bulbs....................... 345 Shift lever lighting...............................249 Turn signal lever....................................122 Vanity lights.......................................... 260 Wattage ................................................... 419 Load capacity.......................................... 168 Alphabetical index M Maintenance Do-it-yourself maintenance......... 296 General maintenance......................292 Maintenance data ...............................410 Maintenance requirements..........290 Meter Instrument panel light control .......125 Meters....................................................... 124 Mirrors Inside rear view mirror .......................57 Side mirror heater.................................191 Side mirrors.............................................58 Vanity mirrors .....................................260 Moon roof ...................................................63 MP3 disc ..................................................207 Multi-information display....................130 O Odometer................................................. 124 Oil Engine oil...............................................305 Opener Fuel filler door .........................................67 Hood .......................................................300 Trunk............................................................. 41 Outer foot lights Outer foot lights................................. 249 Wattage ...................................................419 Outside rear view mirrors Adjusting and folding .........................58 Mirror position memory ....................44 Outside temperature display............. 131 Overhead console .............................. 255 Overheating, Engine .......................... 405 P Parking assist sensors.......................... 153 Parking brake.......................................... 123 Parking lights Replacing light bulbs........................347 Switch........................................................ 134 Wattage................................................... 419 PCS ............................................................. 162 Personal lights Switch........................................................ 251 Power outlet............................................264 Power steering fluid.............................. 312 Power windows ........................................60 Pre-collision system.............................. 162 R Radar cruise control............................. 144 Radiator .......................................................311 Radio................................................................ 194 Radio data system ................................. 195 RDS ............................................................. 195 Rear side marker lights Replacing light bulbs........................345 Wattage................................................... 419 Rear sunshade .......................................268 Rear turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs........................345 Wattage................................................... 419 Rear window defogger .........................191 Replacing Electronic key battery......................334 Fuses.........................................................336 Light bulbs.............................................345 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners..........................................442 453 Alphabetical index S Seat belts Adjusting the seat belt..........................51 Automatic Locking Retractor ........ 52 Child restraint system installation ............................................. 97 Cleaning and maintaining the seat belts.....................................288 Emergency Locking Retractor...... 52 How to wear your seat belt.............50 How your child should wear the seat belt.......................................... 53 Pregnant women, proper seat belt use......................... 52 Reminder light.....................................366 Seat belt extenders.............................. 53 Seat belt pretensioners........................51 Seat heaters ............................................265 Seat position memory............................ 47 Seat ventilators ......................................265 Seating capacity .....................................168 Seats Adjustment............................................... 43 Adjustment precautions.................... 43 Child seats/child restraint system installation ............................. 97 Cleaning................................................. 287 Driver’s seat position memory....... 44 Front passenger seat position memory...................................................47 Head restraint......................................... 49 Properly sitting in the seat................ 75 Seat heaters..........................................265 Ventilated seats..................................265 Service reminder indicators ............. 126 454 Shift lever Automatic transmission .....................119 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P...................................398 Shift lever lighting................................. 249 Shift lock system....................................398 Side airbags ................................................77 Side marker lights Replacing light bulbs........................347 Switch........................................................ 134 Wattage ................................................... 419 Side mirror Adjusting and folding......................... 58 Mirror position memory....................44 Smart access system with push-button start Entry function .......................................... 22 Starting the engine................................116 Spare tire Inflation pressure ................................326 Spare tire ...............................................386 Spark plug .................................................414 Specifications.......................................... 410 Speech command switch* Speedometer ...........................................124 Steering wheel Audio switches..................................... 219 Power adjustment................................ 56 Steering wheel position memory ..................................................44 Stop lights Replacing light bulbs....................... 345 Wattage ................................................... 419 Storage feature ..................................... 252 Alphabetical index Stuck If your vehicle becomes stuck .... 407 Sun visors................................................. 259 Sunshade Rear..........................................................268 Roof............................................................. 65 Switch Engine switch ..........................................116 Fog light switch..................................... 137 Ignition switch..........................................116 Light switches........................................134 Power door lock switch.....................37 Power window switch........................ 60 Window lock switch ........................... 60 Wipers and washer switch.............138 T Tachometer .............................................. 124 Tail lights Replacing light bulbs ....................... 345 Switch........................................................134 Wattage ...................................................419 Talk switch* Telephone switch* Theft deterrent system Alarm...........................................................72 Engine immobilizer system ............. 70 Theft prevention labels ..........................74 Tire inflation pressure..........................326 Tire information Glossary ................................................ 428 Size ........................................................... 425 Tire identification number ............. 425 Uniform tire quality grading......... 426 Tires Chains ........................................................ 171 Checking ................................................318 If you have a flat tire ......................... 386 Inflation pressure................................326 Inflation pressure sensor ................. 319 Information ............................................423 Replacing .............................................. 386 Rotating tires .........................................318 Size..............................................................417 Snow tires ................................................173 Spare tire............................................... 386 Tools...........................................................386 Total load capacity ................................ 168 Towing Dinghy towing ...................................... 182 Emergency towing............................354 Trailer towing .........................................175 TRAC.......................................................... 159 Traction control...................................... 159 Trip meter ................................................. 124 Trunk Extending a space.............................270 Opener ........................................................41 Trunk light Trunk light................................................. 42 Wattage................................................... 419 Turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs........................345 Switch.........................................................122 Wattage................................................... 419 *: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. 455 Alphabetical index V Vanity lights Vanity lights ..........................................260 Wattage....................................................419 Vanity mirrors ........................................260 Vehicle identification number ............411 Vehicle stability control....................... 159 Ventilators ...............................................265 VSC............................................................. 159 W Warning buzzers Brake system .......................................364 Downshifting............................................121 Open door ..........................................366 Seat belt reminder.............................366 Warning lights Anti-lock brake system...................365 Brake assist system...........................365 Brake system .......................................364 Charging system ...............................365 Low fuel level.......................................366 Low tire pressure warning light........................................................366 Malfunction indicator lamp...........365 Master warning light ........................366 Open door ...........................................366 Pre-collision system .........................365 Pretensioners.......................................365 Rear light failure warning light.....366 Seat belt reminder light ..................366 SRS airbags ..........................................365 456 Warning messages Dynamic radar cruise control....................... 376, 378 Engine oil level.................................... 378 Engine oil maintenance.................. 378 Engine oil pressure............................375 Hood ....................................................... 378 Intuitive parking assist sensor...................................... 376, 378 Moon roof............................................. 378 Open door........................................... 378 Parking brake...................................... 378 Pre-collision system............. 376, 378 Smart access system with push-button start ...........................383 Steering lock.........................................376 Traction control...................................376 Trunk........................................................ 378 Vehicle stability control...................376 Washer fluid ........................................ 378 Washer Checking................................................. 317 Preparing and checking before winter......................................169 Switch........................................................138 Washing and waxing...........................284 Weight Cargo capacity ....................................165 Load limits...............................................168 Weight......................................................410 Wheels......................................................330 Window glasses ...................................... 60 Window lock switch ............................... 60 Alphabetical index Windows Power windows .................................... 60 Rear window defogger ......................191 Washer.....................................................138 Windshield wipers Position..................................................... 172 Windshield wipers..............................138 Wireless remote control key Replacing the battery ...................... 334 Wireless remote control key...........34 WMA disc................................................207 457 What to do if... What to do if... A tire punctures P. 386 If you have a flat tire P. 396 If the engine will not start The engine does not start The shift lever cannot be moved out Engine immobilizer system If the electronic key does not operate P. 400 properly P. 70 P. 398 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone P. 405 If your vehicle overheats Steam can be seen coming from under the hood The key is lost P. 399 If you lose your keys The battery runs out P. 402 If the vehicle battery is discharged The doors cannot be locked P. 37 Doors The horn begins to sound P. 72 Alarm The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand 458 P. 407 If the vehicle becomes stuck What to do if... The warning light or indicator light comes on P. 364 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ■Warning lights Brake system warning light or Malfunction indicator lamp or P. 364 P. 365 Driver’s seat belt reminder light P. 366 “ABS” warning light or P. 365 Low fuel level warning light P. 366 SRS warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light or P. 366 Master warning light P. 365 Open door warning light P. 366 Rear light failure warning light P. 366 P. 366 Pre-collision system warning light P. 365 Tire pressure warning light P. 366 Charging system warning light P. 365 459 GAS STATION INFORMATION Auxiliary catch lever P. 300 Hood lock release lever P. 300 Fuel tank capacity Fuel type Cold tire inflation pressure Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill) Engine oil type 460 Trunk opener P. 41 Fuel filler door opener P. 67 Fuel filler door P. 67 Tire inflation pressure P. 417 18.5 gal. (70L, 15.4 lmp.gal.) Unleaded gasoline only P. 68, 412 P. 417 qt. (L, Imp.qt.) With filter 6.4 (6.1, 5.3) Without filter 6.0 (5.7, 5.0) Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W-30 P. 413
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c015 84.159810, 2016/09/10-02:41:30 Modify Date : 2017:08:16 15:18:12-07:00 Create Date : 2016:07:07 10:51:47-07:00 Metadata Date : 2017:08:16 15:18:12-07:00 Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:e388806e-a630-4cd0-aab7-4cd441f2abf9 Instance ID : uuid:8fb3d922-a75e-4677-b43e-8661cd41d32c Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 460EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools